You are on page 1of 763

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

V100R006C03

Commissioning Guide

Issue 03
Date 2012-06-22

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 8800 V100R006C03

OptiX OSN 6800 V100R006C03

OptiX OSN 3800 V100R006C03

iManager U2000 V100R006C00

iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R006C00

NOTE

The Commissioning Guide for the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C02 and V100R006C03 are the same.

Intended Audience
This document provides information about commissioning and testing operations after hardware
installation. It describes the preparations, methods and procedures for station and network
commissioning.
This document is intended for:
l Installation and commissioning engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which


if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not


avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement


important points of the main text.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Based on Product Version V100R006C03


The update of contents is described as follows:

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Update Description

9 Automatic l 9.9 Routine Maintenance is added.


Commissioning l 9.10.7 Common Problems Found During Link Optimization
Commissioning is added.
l 9.10.8 How to Deal with the Problem When the Optical Power of
the RAU Board Cannot Be Adjusted to the Target Value? is added.
l 9.10.9 Performing Other Operation Tasks Fails During NMS Data
Synchronization is added.
l 9.10.10 Commissioning Fails Due to a Mismatch of Board
Manufacturer Information Between the NMS and Live Network
is added.

5 5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier is modified.


Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site

8 Example for 8.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent
Commissioning Transmission System is modified.
the Optical
Power of the
Coherent
Transmission
System

16.34 l PRBS Application Scenarios is deleted.


Configuring the l 16.34.1 PRBS Test is added.
PRBS Test

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-04-05) Based on Product Version V100R006C03


The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

5.7.9 Adjusting Adjusting the Optical Power in the Receive Direction is modified.
the On-off Gain
of the Raman
Board

9 Automatic Automatic Commissioning is modified.


Commissioning

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-12-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C03


The update of contents is described as follows:

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Update Description

8 Example for Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent
Commissioning Transmission System is added.
the Optical
Power of the
Coherent
Transmission
System

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Based on Product Version V100R006C01


The update of contents is described as follows:

Update Description

5.7.9 Adjusting Adjusting the Optical Power in the Receive Direction is modified.
the On-off Gain
of the Raman
Board

Automatic Automatic Commissioning is deleted.


Commissioning

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01


The update of contents is described as follows:

Update Description

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C01


The update of contents is described as follows:

Update Description

2 Quick Guide Quick Guide is added.

16.35 Managing Managing NE Power Consumption is added.


NE Power
Consumption

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-09-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00


The update of contents is described as follows:

Update Description

2 Quick Guide Quick Guide is added.

16.35 Managing Managing NE Power Consumption is added.


NE Power
Consumption

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00


The update of contents is described as follows:

Update Description

5 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board is deleted.


Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site

9 Automatic Automatic Commissioning is modified.


Commissioning

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C00


Update Description

3 The procedures for commissioning and configuration during deployment


Commissioning are added.
and
Configuration
Procedure
During
Deployment

4 Configuring 4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is added.
NE and
Network

5.11 5.11.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD9


Commissioning +WSMD9) is added.
Optical Power
of ROADM
Board

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Update Description

5.13 Example of 5.13.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9


Commissioning +WSMD9) is added.
Optical Power
Based on 10G
(or Lower)
Single-
Wavelength
System

6 Remotely 6.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths and
Commissioning link at ROADM station C (WSMD9+WSMD9) is added.
Optical Power

10 Configuring The chapter "Configuring Services and System Features" is added and
Services and provides hyperlinks to the Configuration Guide and Feature
System Description where detailed procedures for configuring services and
Features system features are described. In this manner, the whole commissioning
process during deployment is provided.

11 11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal


Commissioning Alarms, 11.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection,
the Network 11.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System, 13 Checklist for
Commissioning During Deployment, and 14 Backing Up the NE
Database to the SCC Board are added.

16 Reference The section "Reference for Commissioning During Deployment" is


Operations for added.
the
Commissioning
and
Configuration

17 Parameters The section "Parameter Description" is added.


Reference

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-20) Based on Product Version V100R005C00


The update of contents is described as follows:
l Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00


This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this
release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04,
and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document

Update Description

Whole manual l This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiX
OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 3800. Any difference
between the products is described in the manual.
l The equipment name is changed from OptiX OSN 8800 I to OptiX
OSN 8800 T32 or from OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800 T64.

4 Configuring Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search is added.


NE and Network

5.7 Description of commissioning the optical power of Raman boards is


Commissioning modified. The structure of the contents is adjusted and certain contents
Guide of the are added.
Raman
Amplifier

5 11.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks is added.


Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site

5 11.6.3 Testing Items is added.


Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site

7 Example of 7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System, 7.2 Process for
Commissioning Commissioning a 40G System, 7.3 Preparations for
Optical Power Commissioning, and 7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems
Based on 40 in a 40G System are added.
Gbit/s Single-
Wavelength
System

9 Automatic Automatic Commissioning is added. This section describes the scenarios


Commissioning where the WDM optical power commissioning tool is used to
automatically commission optical power of sites and the preparations and
procedure for the commissioning.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii


1 Preparations for Commissioning................................................................................................1
1.1 Safety Operation Guide......................................................................................................................................2
1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols........................................................................................................................2
1.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers..................................................................................................................................2
1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on............................................................................................5
1.1.4 ESD............................................................................................................................................................5
1.2 Instruments and Tools........................................................................................................................................6
1.3 Reference Documents.......................................................................................................................................10
1.4 Engineering Design Information......................................................................................................................11
1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document................................................................................................................11
1.4.2 Engineering Design Document................................................................................................................11
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check ..................................................................................................................11
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers...................................................................................................11
1.7 Testing Connection Points................................................................................................................................12
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer.......................................................................................................................20
1.8.1 Connecting the U2000 Server Directly...................................................................................................20
1.8.2 Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN.......................................................................................22

2 Quick Guide.................................................................................................................................24
2.1 U2000 Quick Guide..........................................................................................................................................25
2.1.1 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows)................................................................25
2.1.2 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Solaris)....................................................................27
2.1.3 Starting the U2000 Server (HA System, Windows)................................................................................30
2.1.4 Starting the U2000 Server in a High Availability System (Solaris)........................................................31
2.1.5 Logging In to the U2000 Client...............................................................................................................33
2.1.6 Shutting Down U2000 Clients.................................................................................................................35
2.1.7 Shutting Down the MDS 6630 Server.....................................................................................................36
2.1.8 Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Solaris)........................................................37
2.1.9 Shutting Down the High Availability System (Windows)......................................................................39
2.1.10 Shutting Down the U2000 Server in a High Availability System (Solaris)..........................................41
2.2 Web LCT Quick Guide.....................................................................................................................................43
2.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to NEs............................................................................................................44

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

2.2.2 Starting the Web LCT..............................................................................................................................44


2.2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT....................................................................................................................45
2.2.4 Shutting Down the Web LCT..................................................................................................................45
2.3 Entering the Common Views...........................................................................................................................46
2.3.1 Opening the Main Topology on the U2000.............................................................................................46
2.3.2 NE List on the Web LCT.........................................................................................................................46
2.3.3 Opening the NE Explorer........................................................................................................................47
2.3.4 Opening the NE Panel.............................................................................................................................48
2.4 Using Online Help............................................................................................................................................52

3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During Deployment...............................54


4 Configuring NE and Network...................................................................................................60
4.1 Creating NEs in Batches...................................................................................................................................62
4.2 Creating Optical NEs........................................................................................................................................65
4.3 Logging In to an NE.........................................................................................................................................65
4.4 Uploading the NE Data.....................................................................................................................................66
4.5 Setting NE ID and IP........................................................................................................................................67
4.6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually......................................................69
4.7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE....................................................................................70
4.8 Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication...........................................................................................71
4.9 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions...................................................................................................75
4.10 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode................................................................................................76
4.11 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search..............................................................................................................78
4.12 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection........................................................................................79
4.13 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64............................................................81
4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16.............................................................................85
4.15 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800....................................................................................89

5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site...................................................................................94


5.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power.................................................................................................96
5.1.1 Basic Requirements.................................................................................................................................96
5.1.2 General Commissioning Sequence..........................................................................................................96
5.1.3 Commissioning Tools and Instruments...................................................................................................98
5.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board.................................................................................................98
5.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light....................................................................................................98
5.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU Board..................................................................................99
5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board........................................................................................100
5.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board...............................................................................................100
5.5 Testing Specifications of an SDH Board........................................................................................................101
5.5.1 Testing the Mean Launched Optical Power of Optical Interface Boards..............................................101
5.5.2 Testing the Actual Received Optical Power of an Optical Interface Board..........................................103
5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board...............................................................105
5.6.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Optical Amplifier Board...........................................................106

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

5.6.2 Adjusting the Gains for the Optical Amplifier Board...........................................................................107


5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier.............................................................................................108
5.7.1 Preparations...........................................................................................................................................110
5.7.2 Precautions.............................................................................................................................................110
5.7.3 Requirements on the Fiber Line............................................................................................................111
5.7.4 Checking the Fiber Connections............................................................................................................112
5.7.5 Connecting the Fiber Jumpers on the Line Side....................................................................................113
5.7.6 Checking the Configuration of the IPA Function..................................................................................115
5.7.7 Configuring the Working Mode and Fiber Type for the Raman Board................................................116
5.7.8 Adjusting the Gains for the Raman Board.............................................................................................116
5.7.9 Adjusting the On-off Gain of the Raman Board....................................................................................118
5.7.10 Adjusting the Gain Spectrum..............................................................................................................120
5.8 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light..............................................................................................121
5.9 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory Channel................................................................................124
5.9.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of the OSC Board..........................................................................125
5.9.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of ESC Board.................................................................................129
5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board...................................................130
5.10.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V and D40V Boards........................................................130
5.10.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU/SFIU Board......................................................................131
5.10.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board.............................................................................133
5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board......................................................................................135
5.11.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM+ROAM)...............................................135
5.11.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+WSM9).................................................137
5.11.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+RMU9).................................................138
5.11.4 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (RDU9+WSM9).................................................140
5.11.5 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD4+WSMD4)..........................................141
5.11.6 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD2+WSMD2)..........................................143
5.11.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD9+WSMD9)..........................................145
5.12 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM......................................................................................................146
5.13 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System...........147
5.13.1 Example Description...........................................................................................................................147
5.13.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station....................................................148
5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA..............................................................................................152
5.13.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End........................................................................154
5.13.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board)...................158
5.13.6 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MRx+MRx)..................................................................160
5.13.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM+ROAM)..........................................................164
5.13.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)...........................................................167
5.13.9 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)............................................................171
5.13.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (RDU9+WSM9)..........................................................177
5.13.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)...................................................181
5.13.12 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD2+WSMD2)...................................................183

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

5.13.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9+WSMD9)...................................................186

6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power............................................................................190


6.1 General Commissioning Sequence.................................................................................................................191
6.1.1 Commissioning Procedure for the Chain Network................................................................................193
6.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring Network.................................................................................194
6.1.3 Commissioning Procedure for the Mesh Network................................................................................196
6.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power Commissioning...............................................................198
6.2.1 Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards..................................................................................................198
6.2.2 Adjusting Internal Attenuators on Boards.............................................................................................200
6.2.3 Configuring the MCA Board.................................................................................................................201
6.2.4 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line Boards..............................................................................201
6.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain Network....................................................202
6.3.1 Example Description.............................................................................................................................202
6.3.2 Commissioning Procedure.....................................................................................................................205
6.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A..................................211
6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B..................................................................215
6.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9
+RMU9)..........................................................................................................................................................219
6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9
+WSM9).........................................................................................................................................................226
6.3.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9
+WSM9).........................................................................................................................................................228
6.3.8 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (ROAM
+ROAM).........................................................................................................................................................230
6.3.9 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD4
+WSMD4)......................................................................................................................................................231
6.3.10 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD2
+WSMD2)......................................................................................................................................................233
6.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths and link at ROADM station C (WSMD9
+WSMD9)......................................................................................................................................................234
6.3.12 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station D......................................................................235
6.3.13 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V)
........................................................................................................................................................................236
6.3.14 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board
+Demultiplexer Board)...................................................................................................................................239
6.3.15 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station F.......................................................................241
6.3.16 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OTM Station G....................................................................242
6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization.............243
6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization.............248
6.3.19 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Station E and OLA Station F for Equalization..............249
6.3.20 Commissioning Optical Power (Without MCAs)...............................................................................250
6.3.21 Commissioning Input Optical Power of OTU.....................................................................................251
6.3.22 Commissioning OSNR........................................................................................................................253
6.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long Spans......................................................................253

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

7 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength


System.............................................................................................................................................257
7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System........................................................................................................259
7.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System.....................................................................................................263
7.3 Preparations for Commissioning....................................................................................................................264
7.3.1 Checking Design Documents................................................................................................................264
7.3.2 40G Commissioning Meter...................................................................................................................267
7.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System....................269
7.4.1 Example Description.............................................................................................................................269
7.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the OTM Station................................274
7.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station and the OTM Station at the Receive End
........................................................................................................................................................................276
7.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization...................................................................................278
7.4.5 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System..........................................................................................278
7.4.6 OSNR Penalties.....................................................................................................................................284
7.4.7 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation.....................................................................................................297
7.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System...............................299
7.5.1 Example Description.............................................................................................................................299
7.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station.......................................................305
7.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station..............................................................................308
7.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station........................................................310
7.5.5 Commissioning Optical Power for Equalization...................................................................................313
7.5.6 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation.....................................................................................................314
7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G System.....................................................................315
7.6.1 OSNR Failure........................................................................................................................................315
7.6.2 Excessively High Incident Optical Power.............................................................................................315
7.6.3 Incorrect Dispersion Configuration.......................................................................................................315
7.6.4 Methods for Handling Other Faults.......................................................................................................316

8 Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System
..........................................................................................................................................................318
8.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System....................................319
8.2 Process for Commissioning coherent transmission system............................................................................321
8.3 Preparations for Commissioning....................................................................................................................322
8.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on 100 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System..................323
8.4.1 Example Description.............................................................................................................................324
8.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the OTM Station................................325
8.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station................................................................326
8.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Added Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station (Colorless)
........................................................................................................................................................................328
8.4.5 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station........................................................332
8.4.6 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization...................................................................................334

9 Automatic Commissioning......................................................................................................335

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

9.1 Version Mapping............................................................................................................................................337


9.2 Network Models and Application Scenarios..................................................................................................337
9.3 Precautions for Commissioning......................................................................................................................347
9.4 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of a New Network.......................................................349
9.4.1 Commissioning Process.........................................................................................................................349
9.4.2 Preparing for the Commissioning..........................................................................................................350
9.4.3 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters...........................................................................................351
9.4.4 Choosing Commissioning Trails...........................................................................................................353
9.4.5 Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning (Optional)...............................................................356
9.4.6 Commissioning Optical Power..............................................................................................................357
9.4.7 Viewing the Commissioning Result......................................................................................................361
9.5 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of an Expanded Network.............................................362
9.5.1 Commissioning Process.........................................................................................................................362
9.5.2 Preparing for the Commissioning..........................................................................................................363
9.5.3 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters...........................................................................................365
9.5.4 Choosing Commissioning Trails...........................................................................................................366
9.5.5 Fiber Connection Verification (for Expansion Commissioning)..........................................................370
9.5.6 Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning (Optional)...............................................................372
9.5.7 Commissioning Optical Power of Expansion Deployment...................................................................372
9.5.8 Viewing the Commissioning Result......................................................................................................377
9.6 Optical Power Commissioning During Maintenance.....................................................................................378
9.6.1 Commissioning Process.........................................................................................................................378
9.6.2 Preparing for the Commissioning..........................................................................................................380
9.6.3 Online Monitoring.................................................................................................................................381
9.6.4 Link Optimization..................................................................................................................................390
9.7 Commissioning Report...................................................................................................................................400
9.7.1 Preparing for Generating a Commissioning Report..............................................................................401
9.7.2 Generating Commissioning Report.......................................................................................................401
9.8 Reference........................................................................................................................................................406
9.8.1 Viewing Operation Tasks......................................................................................................................406
9.8.2 Synchronizing Data on the U2000.........................................................................................................407
9.8.3 Setting Optical Amplifier Information..................................................................................................409
9.8.4 Setting Fiber Types................................................................................................................................410
9.8.5 Querying Commissioning Index Data...................................................................................................411
9.9 Routine Maintenance......................................................................................................................................415
9.9.1 Preventive Maintenance Items...............................................................................................................415
9.9.2 Maintenance Operations........................................................................................................................416
9.10 FAQ..............................................................................................................................................................418
9.10.1 FAQs in the Optical Power Commissioning Window.........................................................................418
9.10.2 How to Optimize the Optical Power Using the U2000 when the Span Loss changed and the OA Gain
could not Match it...........................................................................................................................................420
9.10.3 What Restrictions Does the U2000 Have on Optical NE Classification.............................................420
9.10.4 FAQs About Setting Subnet Parameters.............................................................................................421

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

9.10.5 FAQs About Trail Commissioning......................................................................................................421


9.10.6 Solutions to Abnormal Optical Power in the Link Report..................................................................422
9.10.7 Common Problems Found During Link Optimization Commissioning..............................................423
9.10.8 How to Deal with the Problem When the Optical Power of the RAU Board Cannot Be Adjusted to the
Target Value?.................................................................................................................................................423
9.10.9 Performing Other Operation Tasks Fails During NMS Data Synchronization...................................423
9.10.10 Commissioning Fails Due to a Mismatch of Board Manufacturer Information Between the NMS and
Live Network..................................................................................................................................................423

10 Configuring Services and System Features........................................................................425


10.1 Configuring Boards......................................................................................................................................426
10.1.1 Checking Board Parameters................................................................................................................426
10.1.2 Adding Ports........................................................................................................................................441
10.1.3 Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board..............................................................................................441
10.2 Configuring Services....................................................................................................................................442
10.3 Configuring System Features.......................................................................................................................443

11 Commissioning the Network................................................................................................445


11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms........................................................447
11.2 Testing Protection Switching........................................................................................................................448
11.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection..............................................................................449
11.2.2 Testing the 1+1 Protection of the Cross-Connect Board and Clock Board for OptiX OSN 8800......451
11.2.3 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching of the Cross-Connect Board for OptiX OSN 6800.......................452
11.2.4 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the SCC Boards..................................................................453
11.2.5 Testing Optical Line Protection Switching.........................................................................................454
11.2.6 Testing Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Switching....................................................................................456
11.2.7 Testing Client 1+1 Protection Switching.............................................................................................458
11.2.8 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching.............................................................................................461
11.2.9 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection Switching........................................................................................465
11.2.10 Testing VLAN SNCP Protection Switching.....................................................................................468
11.2.11 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection Switching.................................................................................471
11.2.12 Testing Board-Level Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)...............................................473
11.2.13 Testing Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP Protection Switching...........................475
11.2.14 Testing DBPS and ERPS Protection Switching................................................................................479
11.2.15 Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection Switching...........................................................................482
11.2.16 Testing DLAG Protection (OTN) Switching.....................................................................................486
11.2.17 Testing ODUk SPRing Protection Switching....................................................................................488
11.2.18 Testing Optical Wavelength Shared Protection Switching...............................................................491
11.2.19 Testing Linear MS Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)...........................................................494
11.2.20 Testing Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)...................495
11.2.21 Testing Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)...................497
11.2.22 Testing SNCP Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)..................................................................500
11.2.23 Testing SNCTP Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)...............................................................502
11.2.24 Testing Transoceanic MSP Ring Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800).....................................504

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

11.2.25 Testing ERPS Protection Switching..................................................................................................507


11.2.26 Testing the DLAG(OCS)...................................................................................................................509
11.3 Testing Data Characteristics.........................................................................................................................510
11.3.1 Testing the LCAS................................................................................................................................510
11.3.2 Testing the LAG..................................................................................................................................512
11.3.3 Testing the LPT...................................................................................................................................514
11.3.4 Testing the STP/RSTP.........................................................................................................................515
11.3.5 Testing the MSTP................................................................................................................................517
11.4 Testing System Features...............................................................................................................................518
11.4.1 Testing IPA..........................................................................................................................................518
11.4.2 Testing IPA (Raman System)..............................................................................................................519
11.4.3 Testing ALC........................................................................................................................................522
11.4.4 Testing APE.........................................................................................................................................524
11.4.5 Testing EAPE......................................................................................................................................525
11.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks.....................................................................................................................528
11.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2....................................................................................................................................530
11.6.1 Testing Process....................................................................................................................................531
11.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation...............................................................................................................532
11.6.3 Testing Items.......................................................................................................................................535
11.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels...............................................................................................................538
11.7.1 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using Laptops........................................................................538
11.7.2 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using the Ethernet OAM Function........................................540
11.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System.......................................................................................................541
11.8.1 Setting the Orderwire Board................................................................................................................541
11.8.2 Configuring Orderwire........................................................................................................................542
11.8.3 Configuring Conference Calls.............................................................................................................543
11.8.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets................................................................................................................544
11.9 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS System..................................................................................545
11.9.1 Configuring Orderwire........................................................................................................................545
11.9.2 Configuring Conference Calls.............................................................................................................546
11.9.3 Dividing Orderwire Subnets................................................................................................................547
11.10 Testing Orderwire Functions......................................................................................................................548

12 Testing Bit Errors.....................................................................................................................550


12.1 Testing 10-Minute Bit Errors for Each Optical Channel..............................................................................552
12.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors.....................................................................................................................554

13 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment.........................................................557


14 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board................................................................559
15 Analyzing and Handling Common Deployment Problems...........................................561
15.1 OSC/ESC Conflict........................................................................................................................................562
15.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports..........................................................................................................563

16 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration...............................565

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

16.1 Configuring the NE Data..............................................................................................................................569


16.1.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually.....................................................................................................569
16.1.2 Replicating the NE Data......................................................................................................................570
16.2 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack..............................................................................................................571
16.2.1 Master/Slave Subrack Configuration...................................................................................................571
16.2.2 Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of an NE................................................................................571
16.2.3 Changing a Subrack Attribute.............................................................................................................572
16.2.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack..............................................................................................572
16.2.5 Deleting a Slave Subrack.....................................................................................................................573
16.3 Configuring Wavelength Grooming.............................................................................................................574
16.3.1 Basic Concepts....................................................................................................................................574
16.3.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow........................................................................................575
16.3.3 Configuring the ROADM....................................................................................................................575
16.4 Configuring the NE Time.............................................................................................................................586
16.4.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the U2000/Web LCT and NEs...................................................587
16.4.2 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with the NMS Time..........................................587
16.4.3 Configuring the Standard NTP Key....................................................................................................588
16.4.4 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server Time......................................................589
16.5 Performance Management............................................................................................................................590
16.5.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold...........................................................................................590
16.5.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters......................................................................................590
16.5.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers..............................................................................................593
16.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEs..................................................................................................................594
16.6.1 Modifying the NE Name.....................................................................................................................594
16.6.2 Modifying the Optical NE Name.........................................................................................................595
16.6.3 Modifying GNE Parameters................................................................................................................595
16.6.4 Changing the GNE for NEs.................................................................................................................596
16.6.5 Changing a GNE to a Normal NE.......................................................................................................597
16.6.6 Changing a Normal NE to a GNE.......................................................................................................597
16.6.7 Deleting NEs........................................................................................................................................598
16.7 Modifying the Boards Configuration...........................................................................................................599
16.7.1 Deleting Boards...................................................................................................................................599
16.7.2 Adding Boards.....................................................................................................................................599
16.8 Modifying the Fibers Configuration.............................................................................................................600
16.8.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information....................................................................................................600
16.8.2 Deleting Fibers....................................................................................................................................601
16.9 Creating a Single NE....................................................................................................................................602
16.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User................................................................................................................603
16.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode..................................................................................................604
16.12 Configuring the Edge Port..........................................................................................................................606
16.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection.................................................................................................607
16.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes..................................................................................................609

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

16.15 Configuring Board SDH Port Attributes....................................................................................................610


16.16 Opening/Closing Lasers.............................................................................................................................610
16.17 Setting the Rated Optical Power of the OA Board.....................................................................................611
16.18 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards........................................................................................612
16.19 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters............................................................................................612
16.20 Configuring the Service Mode...................................................................................................................614
16.21 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC).......................................................................................................614
16.22 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board...........................................................................615
16.23 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board.............................................................................616
16.24 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering Protection Switching..............................................................617
16.25 Setting the NULL Mapping Status.............................................................................................................618
16.26 Configuring Path Binding...........................................................................................................................619
16.27 Configuring Centralized Wavelength Monitoring......................................................................................620
16.28 Configuring the FEC Function...................................................................................................................621
16.29 Enabling and Disabling LPT......................................................................................................................622
16.30 Setting the Speed Level of Fans.................................................................................................................623
16.31 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm Signals Using the RS232 Serial Port...................................624
16.32 Configuring Ethernet Boards......................................................................................................................625
16.32.1 Configuring Internal Ports.................................................................................................................625
16.32.2 Configuring External Ports................................................................................................................627
16.33 Verifying Ethernet Services........................................................................................................................629
16.34 Configuring the PRBS Test........................................................................................................................629
16.34.1 PRBS Test..........................................................................................................................................629
16.34.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary Board...............................................................631
16.34.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board ....................................................................................632
16.35 Managing NE Power Consumption............................................................................................................634
16.35.1 Monitoring NE Power Consumption.................................................................................................634
16.35.2 Configuring Energy Conservation for an NE....................................................................................636
16.35.3 Viewing the Network-wide NE Power Consumption Report...........................................................637
16.36 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data...........................................................................................................638
16.36.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods..............................................................638
16.36.2 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card......................................................................640
16.36.3 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client.....................................................641
16.36.4 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board..............................................................................642
16.36.5 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card..................................................................................642
16.36.6 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client..................................................643

17 Parameters Reference..............................................................................................................645
17.1 Parameters (Creating a Network).................................................................................................................646
17.1.1 Laser Spectrum Analysis.....................................................................................................................646
17.1.2 Wavelength Monitoring Management.................................................................................................648
17.1.3 Orderwire Board Settings....................................................................................................................648
17.1.4 General.................................................................................................................................................648

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xviii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents

17.1.5 Conference Call...................................................................................................................................650


17.1.6 Auxiliary..............................................................................................................................................651
17.1.7 NE Attributes.......................................................................................................................................651
17.1.8 NE User Management.........................................................................................................................652
17.1.9 NE Time Synchronization...................................................................................................................657
17.1.10 Standard NTP Key Management.......................................................................................................661
17.1.11 Path Binding......................................................................................................................................662
17.2 Parameters: WDM Interface.........................................................................................................................662
17.2.1 Optical Transponder Board.................................................................................................................663
17.2.2 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board.................................................................................................673
17.2.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplex Board..............................................................................................677
17.2.4 Tributary and Line Boards...................................................................................................................680
17.2.5 Optical Amplifier Board......................................................................................................................682
17.2.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Board....................................................................................................688
17.2.7 Protection Board..................................................................................................................................690
17.2.8 Spectrum Analysis Board....................................................................................................................691
17.2.9 Variable Optical Attenuation Board....................................................................................................694
17.2.10 Dispersion Compensation Board.......................................................................................................696
17.3 Parameters (Configuring Wavelength Grooming)........................................................................................697
17.3.1 Parameters: Edge Port.........................................................................................................................697
17.3.2 Parameters: Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection........................................................................698
17.3.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection.........................................................................699
17.3.4 Parameters: Enabling the Port Blocking Function..............................................................................700

A Glossary......................................................................................................................................702

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

1 Preparations for Commissioning

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to prepare for commissioning.

1.1 Safety Operation Guide


This section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal safety regulations
and equipment operating regulations. These regulations must be followed to prevent personal
injuries or damages to the equipment during operations.
1.2 Instruments and Tools
This section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.
1.3 Reference Documents
This section describes the reference documents required during the commissioning process.
1.4 Engineering Design Information
This section describes the engineering design information required for equipment
commissioning.
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check
Before commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions.
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers
This section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers.
1.7 Testing Connection Points
This section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function and
connection types.
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer
This section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the NMS manages
the NE.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

1.1 Safety Operation Guide


This section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal safety regulations
and equipment operating regulations. These regulations must be followed to prevent personal
injuries or damages to the equipment during operations.

1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols


During equipment installation and maintenance, observe the precautions indicated by the alarm
and safety symbols to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage.
Table 1-1 describes the alarm and safety symbols on the WDM equipment.

Table 1-1 Symbols on the WDM equipment


Symbol Describes

ESD protection symbol.


You must wear an ESD wrist strap or glove to avoid
damage caused by electrostatic discharge to boards.

Laser level symbol.


Indicates the laser level and warns that laser beams
CAUTION can cause injuries to eyes.
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS

Grounding symbol.
Indicates the position of the grounding point.

Regular cleaning symbol.


Warns you to regularly clean the air filter.

Fan warning symbol.


Warns you not to touch the fan blade until the fan
stops moving.

1.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers


This section describes how to safely use fibers.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

DANGER
Laser beams on the optical interface board or inside the optical fiber can cause damage to your
eyes. When installing and maintaining optical interface boards and optical fibers, avoid directly
exposing your eyes to the laser beams originating from the optical interfaces or fiber connectors.

Protection of Optical Connectors


All idle optical connectors for fiber jumpers and optical ports on the optical interface boards
must be covered with protective caps. The optical ports on the replaced boards must be promptly
covered with protective caps. In addition, properly store these boards in their packages to keep
the optical ports clean.

Recommended protective caps are shown in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Recommended protective caps

Protective caps that are not recommended are shown in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2 Protective caps that are not recommended

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

NOTE

Do not use protective caps that are made of soft rubber. These caps tend to collect dust and other material.
These caps are hard to clean and do not resist the build-up of dust.

Connecting Fibers

CAUTION
When applying a physical fiber loopback between two optical ports, increase the attenuation to
avoid equipment damage in case the laser optical power is excessively high. For boards that
have the capability of having optical attenuators added, add an optical attenuator at the Rx optical
port rather than at the Tx optical port.

Insert fibers into optical connectors carefully when connecting fibers. If the optical power is
excessively high, add a fixed optical attenuator before the optical port to avoid damages to the
device caused by a high input of optical power.

DANGER
Before removing or inserting fibers from/into the CRPC board, shut down the pump laser to
avoid injuries due to the high optical power from the laser.

The CRPC board has specific requirements on fiber loss of the line nearby. For details, see Table
1-2.

Table 1-2 Fiber connection requirements of the CRPC


Distance Loss (dB) Connector (piece)

0–10 (km) ≤0.1 0

10–20 (km) ≤0.2 0

NOTE

The ODF has only one connector for connecting to the CRPC board. All the other fiber connection points must
be spliced.

Cleaning Fibers

CAUTION
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously
affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flanges for each external fiber must be cleaned before
the fibers from the ODF are inserted into the optical ports on the boards in the equipment.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

The fiber connectors and optical ports for the lasers must be cleaned by using special cleaning
tools and materials. Some common cleaning tools are:
l Cleaning solvent. Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used (alcohol or formalin is never
used)
l Non-woven lens tissue
l Special compressed gas
l Dust-free cotton stick
l Special cleaning roll used along with cleaning solvent, either isoamylol or propyl
l Fiberscope
For details on how to clean fibers, see the Supporting Tasks.

1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on


This section describes the requirements for performing operations on the equipment when the
power is on.
Follow these requirements when performing operations on the equipment when the power is on:
l Do not install or disassemble equipment when the power is on.
l Do not install or remove power cables when the power is on.
l Before connecting a cable, ensure that the cable and cable label comply with installation
requirements.

1.1.4 ESD
During installation and maintenance, follow antistatic procedures to prevent equipment damage:
l Always wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation.
l Check that the equipment is securely grounded.

CAUTION
Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch equipment or boards. Make sure
that the wrist strap touches your skin. Insert the ESD strap connector into the ESD socket of the
equipment.

For information about how to wear an ESD wrist strap, see Figure 1-3.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Figure 1-3 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

NOTE

Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the equipment port. For details, see the Quick Installation Guide.

When you are following antistatic procedures, take the following precautions:
l Check the validity and functionality of the wrist strap. Its resistance value must be between
0.75 mega ohm to 10 mega ohm. If the wrist strap validity period (usually two years) has
expired, or if the resistance value fails to meet requirements, replace it with a wrist strap
that provides the required resistance value.
l Do not touch a board with your clothing. Clothing generates static electricity that is not
protected by the wrist strap.
l Wear an ESD wrist strap and place the board on an ESD pad when you replace boards or
chips. Use ESD tweezers or extraction tools to replace chips. Do not touch chips, circuits,
or pins with your bare hands.
l Keep the boards and other ESD-sensitive parts you are installing in ESD bags. Place the
removed boards and components on an ESD pad or ESD material. Do not use non-antistatic
materials such as white foams, common plastic bags, or paper bags to pack boards, and do
not let these materials touch the boards.
l Wear an ESD wrist strap when operating the ports of boards because they are also ESD-
sensitive. Discharge the static electricity of cables and protective sleeves before you connect
them to the ports.
l Keep packing materials (such as, ESD boxes and bags) available in the equipment room
for packing boards in the future.
ESD complies with IEC Publication 1000, EN 55022, EN 55024, IEC 61000 and GR-1089-
CORE.

1.2 Instruments and Tools


This section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.
Table 1-3 describes how the tools and testing instruments are used for equipment
commissioning.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 1-3 Instruments and tools required for commissioning


Tool or Tester Usage

Laptop Used to install the U2000 Web LCT during network element
(NE) commissioning.

Optical power meter Used to measure the received optical power, receiver sensitivity,
and receiver overload at an optical port. It is mainly used to
measure the optical power on the client side and the WDM side
of the OTU. This meter also measures the total optical power of
the multiplexed signals.

Optical spectrum analyzer Used mainly to test the optical power, optical signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR), and central wavelength for each wavelength in
the multiplexed signals.
NOTE
In a DWDM system, the optical power of a single wavelength in the
multiplexed signals needs to be measured using an optical spectrum
analyzer. The commissioning result from this method is more accurate.
When using this method, the noise impact does not need to be
considered.
Calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to perform the
test. Use the following method to verify the calibration: measure the
optical power of the OUT optical port on the OTU using the optical
spectrum analyzer. Then compare it with the optical power obtained by
using an optical power meter. If the difference is less than 0.5 dB, the
calibration is acceptable. If the difference is greater than 0.5 dB,
recalibrate the optical spectrum analyzer.

SDH analyzer Used for network commissioning and SDH service testing.

GE analyzer Used for the GE service testing.

10GE analyzer Used for the 10GE service testing.

OTN analyzer Used for the OTN service testing.

ESCON analyzer Used for the ESCON service testing.

Ethernet analyzer Used for the data service testing.

FICON/FC analyzer Used for the FICON service and FC service testing.

Multimeter Used to test the voltage, resistance, and current intensity during
a power test.

Fiber microscope Used for checking the cleanliness of fiber end faces.

Phillips screwdriver Used to install or uninstall the board screws.

Compressed gas Used to clean optical ports of boards.

Fiber jumper Used for connections during the optical power test of optical
ports on the optical distribution frame (ODF) side.

Cassette cleaner or lens Used to clean fiber end faces.


tissue

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Tool or Tester Usage

Flange Used to transfer the fiber jumper.

Fixed optical attenuator Used to attenuate the received optical power, which may
damage the optical component, during the received optical
power test for an optical port.

Variable optical attenuator Used for testing the receiver sensitivity and overload optical
(VOA) power of an optical port.

A 40G SDH analyzer, an optical spectrum analyzer, and a power meter are required to
commission a 40G system. Table 1-4 lists three 40G SDH analyzers. Table 1-5 lists three types
of optical spectrum analyzers intended for testing a 40G system.
NOTE

A 40G system requires high-precision optical power. Before using an optical spectrum analyzer, calibrate its
optical power setting.

Table 1-4 40G SDH analyzers

Name Appearance

ONT-506

NX 4000

MP1797A

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 1-5 Optical spectrum analyzers intended for 40G system testing
Name Appearance

MTS8000

Agilent86145B/86142

AQ6370/6370B/6319/6317

Table 1-6 lists the 100G test meters.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 1-6 Optical spectrum analyzers for 100G system testing


Name Appearance

JDSU ONT-503

EXFO FTB-500

1.3 Reference Documents


This section describes the reference documents required during the commissioning process.
The following reference documents are required for OptiX OSN 8800 equipment
commissioning:
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Planning Guidelines
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Configuration Guide
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Feature Description
The following reference documents are required for OptiX OSN 6800 equipment
commissioning:
l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description
l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Planning Guidelines
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description
l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Configuration Guide
l OptiX OSN 6800/3800 Feature Description
The following reference documents are required for OptiX OSN 3800 equipment
commissioning:

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description
l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Planning Guidelines
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description
l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Configuration Guide
l OptiX OSN 6800/3800 Feature Description

1.4 Engineering Design Information


This section describes the engineering design information required for equipment
commissioning.

1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document


This section describes the required engineering survey documents.
The required engineering survey documents include the survey report and the work instructions
associated with the engineering survey.

1.4.2 Engineering Design Document


This section describes the engineering design documents required during equipment
commissioning.
The following engineering design documents are required for equipment commissioning:
l Network diagram (including the networking diagram for the entire network, the basic
topological diagram, and the network management diagram)
l Board layout diagram of the cabinet
l Wavelength allocation diagram
l Cabinet fiber connection diagram
l Configuration diagram of the optical amplifiers
l Fiber connection diagram
l Optical attenuator list
l Design description file

1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check


Before commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions.
For details about checking the commissioning conditions, see the Installation Guide.

1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers


This section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers.
Commissioning engineers must have received professional training on optical network
commissioning and are skilled in using the test equipment.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Commissioning engineers must be familiar with:

l WDM, SDH, and Ethernet theories


l WDM equipment
l U2000/Web LCT and service configuration by using the U2000/Web LCT
l Analyzers (WDM, SDH and Ethernet)

1.7 Testing Connection Points


This section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function and
connection types.

Figure 1-4 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. For
the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-7 and Table
1-11.

Figure 1-5 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32. For
the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-7 and Table
1-11.

Figure 1-6 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. For
the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-7 and Table
1-11.

Figure 1-7 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800. For the
functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-8, and Table
1-11.

Figure 1-8 shows the testing connection points on the chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800. For the
functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-9, Table 1-10
and Table 1-11.

Figure 1-4 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64
EFI2 EFI1 PIU STI ATE
53A
PWR
RTN -48V
NM_ETH2
LAMP1 LAMP2

ALMI2 ALMO3
ALMI1 ALMO1
ETH1

CLK2

CLK1
ETH2

TOD2

TOD1
SERIAL
NM_ETH

ALMO4
ALMO2
ETH3

Front Back

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Figure 1-5 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32
EFI2 EFI1
PIU ATE
53A
PWR
RTN -48V

NM_ETH2
LAMP1 LAMP2
ETH1

ALMI2 ALMO3 ALMO4


ALMI1 ALMO1
ETH2

SERIAL
NM_ETH1

ALMO2
ETH3

Fan

Fan

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Figure 1-6 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16
PIU

EFI AUX ATE

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Figure 1-7 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800
COM ETH3 ALM02 ALM04 ALMI1 LAMP1
ALM01 ALM03 SERIAL ALMI2 LAMP2

PIU
xcs SCC
STAT STAT RUN
ACT ACT
PROG PROG
SRV SRV
PWRA
PWRB

NEG(-)
PWRC
ALMC

RTN(+)
SubRACK_ID

NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
ETH1
ETH2
Fan RESET
STAT
PROG
LAMP TEST
AUX

ALM CUT

xc SC
s C

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Figure 1-8 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 3800

FAN

STAT STAT RUN


ACT PROG
PROG
SRV DO not hot
PWRA plug this unit!
PWRB
PWRC
NM_ETH1

ALMC

S1 S11
S6
S5
S4
S2
SCC
SCC
AUX

PIU
PIU
RESET
NM_ETH2

LAMP
TEST
NEG(-)

ALM
CUT

PWR
RTN(+)

CRI
EXT

MAJ

MIN

SCC AUX PIU

Table 1-7 Function description of the testing connection points on the OptiX OSN 8800
Interface Silk- Function Description Connection
Screen Type

ALMO1 Generally the alarm output is sent to the centralized RJ-45


ALMO2 alarm and power distribution cabinet by output
ports and cascading ports. Other modes can be
ALMO3 configured to send the alarm output for assembling
ALMO4 and displaying the alarm. The OptiX OSN 8800
provides eight channels of alarm output. The first
three channels, by default, are critical alarms,
major alarms, and minor alarms. The other five
channels are reserved for alarm output cascading.

SERIAL OAM port is a serial network management (NM) DB9


port which supports the X.25 protocol.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Interface Silk- Function Description Connection


Screen Type

ALMI1 The external alarm input function is designed for RJ-45


ALMI2 an external system that has alarms requiring remote
monitoring (for example, an environment
monitoring system). The names for the eight alarm
channels can be set to achieve remote monitoring
of the external alarms with the external system.

LAMP1 Used to drive the running indicators and alarm RJ-45


LAMP2 indicators for the cabinet where the subrack is
housed.

NM_ETH1 Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port RJ-45


NM_ETH2 on the OptiX OSN 8800 using a network cable to
the network port on the U2000 server to achieve
management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN
8800.
Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port
on one NE through a network cable to that on
another NE to achieve communication between
NEs.

ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 Connect the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 port on one RJ-45


subrack using a network cable to the same ports on
another subrack to achieve communication
between the master subrack and its slave subracks.

CLK1/CLK2 CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time RJ-45


signals. CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional.
That is, they input and output signals at the same
time.

TOD1/TOD2 TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time RJ-45


signals. At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can
either input or output time signals.

PHONE Orderwire phone interface RJ-45

F1 F1 interface RJ-45

Table 1-8 Function description of the testing connection points on the OptiX OSN 6800
Interface Silk- Function Description Connection
Screen Type

COM Commissioning port used for communications RJ-45


between the EFI and AUX boards.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Interface Silk- Function Description Connection


Screen Type

ALMO1 Generally the alarm output is sent to the centralized RJ-45


ALMO2 alarm and power distribution cabinet by output
ports and cascading ports. Other modes can be
ALMO3 configured to send the alarm output for assembling
ALMO4 and displaying the alarm. The OptiX OSN 6800
provides eight channels of alarm output. The first
three channels, by default, are critical alarms,
major alarms, and minor alarms. The other five
channels are reserved for alarm output cascading.

SERIAL OAM port is a serial network management (NM) DB9


port which supports the X.25 protocol.

ALMI1 The external alarm input function is designed for RJ-45


ALMI2 external system that has alarms requiring remote
monitoring (for example, an environment
monitoring system). The names of the eight alarm
channels can be set to achieve remote monitoring
of the external alarms with the external system.

LAMP1 Used to drive the running indicators and alarm RJ-45


LAMP2 indicators of the cabinet where the subrack is
housed.

NM_ETH1 Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 on the OptiX RJ-45


NM_ETH2 OSN 6800 using a network cable to the network
port on the U2000 server to achieve management
of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800.
Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port
on one NE using a network cable to the network
port on another NE to achieve communication
between NEs.

ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 Connect the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 port on one RJ-45


subrack using a network cable to the same ports on
another subrack to achieve communication
between the master subrack and its slave subracks.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 1-9 Function description of the testing connection points on the OptiX OSN 3800
Interface Silk- Connection
Screen Function Description Type

NM_ETH1/ Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port RJ-45


NM_ETH2 on the OptiX OSN 3800 using a network cable to
the network port on the U2000 server to achieve
management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN
3800.
Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port
on one NE using a network cable to the network
port on another NE to achieve communication
between NEs.

EXT Accesses and outputs all external signals. DB64

Table 1-10 Function description of the testing EXT connectors on the OptiX OSN 3800
Interface Silk-
Screen (on Connection
Cables) Function Description Type

ETH Used as the COM commissioning port. RJ-45

F&f Debugs the serial port. DB9

ALMO The alarm output is sent to the centralized alarm RJ-45


and power distribution cabinet by output ports and
cascading ports. The port provides two channels of
alarm output and two channels of output cascading.

ALMI1 The external alarm input function is designed for RJ-45


ALMI2 an external system that has alarms requiring remote
monitoring (for example, an environment
monitoring system). It is used to input six channels
of external alarms.

LAMP1 Used to drive the running indicators and alarm RJ-45


LAMP2 indicators for the cabinet where the chassis is
housed.

Table 1-11 Function description of the testing buttons


Interface Silk-Screen Function Description

RESET Used to reset the SCC board.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Interface Silk-Screen Function Description

ALM CUT The trigger switch is used to mute the alarm from the subrack.
You can either hide the prompt of current alarms by pressing
and then immediately releasing the button, or mute the alarms
by pressing the button for five seconds. When the audible
alarm function is turned off, the ALMC indicator on the SCC
board remains on. Otherwise, the audible alarm function is
turned on, and the ALMC indicator on the SCC board remains
off.

LAMP TEST Used to test the indicators. After you press this button, all
indicators are lit.

1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer


This section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the NMS manages
the NE.

1.8.1 Connecting the U2000 Server Directly


This section describes how to connect the U2000 server to Ethernet port in the subrack using a
cable.

Prerequisites
The subrack must work normally.
The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the U2000 server belong to the same network
segment.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000, network cable

Precautions
If the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the U2000 server to the
master subrack through a network cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the cable. One end of the cable should be connected to the network port of the NMS
computer. The other end should be connected to the specified port on the board.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2
or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port or NM_ETH2
port on the EFI board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the
AUX board.
For the OptiX OSN 3800, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the
AUX board.

Step 2 Determine if the green indicator of the network card interface of the NMS computer remains
constantly on.

Step 3 Check the indicators on the board. The green "LINK" indicator should remain constantly on.
The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.
NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 board or the
indicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port or the indicators for the
NM_ETH2 port on the EFI board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.
For the OptiX OSN 3800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.

Step 4 On Windows XP on the U2000 server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the Start
Menu. The Control Panel window is displayed.

Step 5 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection window is
displayed.

Step 6 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed.

Step 7 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties window is displayed.

Step 8 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
window is displayed.

Step 9 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP address
that is in the same network segment with the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is an integer
from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address must be unique and cannot be the same as any of the
existing IP addresses.

Step 10 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

CAUTION
When configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct connection, do not
configure the gateway. Otherwise, the configured gateway may lead to a failed connection. If
the U2000 server has more than one network card, select the corresponding local connection for
the network card connected to the subrack.

Step 11 Click OK.

----End

1.8.2 Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN


This section describes how to connect the U2000 server to the NE through a LAN.

Prerequisites
When the U2000 server connects to the NE through a LAN, the IP address is set in a way that
is similar to connecting the U2000 server to an Ethernet port in the subrack using a cable. Note
the following requirements:

l The subrack must work normally.


l The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the U2000 server belong to the same network
segment.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000, network cable

Precautions
If the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the U2000 server to the
master subrack through a network cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the NMS computer into the LAN.

Step 2 Check the cable. The NMS computer is connected to the LAN using cables. The equipment is
connected to the LAN through the specified port on the board using cables.
NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2
or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port or NM_ETH2
port on the EFI board.
The OptiX OSN 6800 is connected to the LAN through the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board
using cables.
The OptiX OSN 3800 is connected to the LAN through the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board
using cables.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Step 3 Determine if the indicator for the network card interface of the NMS computer remains
constantly on.

Step 4 Check the indicators on the board. The green "LINK" indicator should remain constantly on.
The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.
NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 board or the
indicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port or the indicators for the
NM_ETH2 port on the EFI board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.
For the OptiX OSN 3800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.

Step 5 In Windows XP on the U2000 server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the Start
Menu. The Control Panel window is displayed.

Step 6 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection window is
displayed.

Step 7 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed.

Step 8 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties window is displayed.

Step 9 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
window is displayed.

Step 10 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP address
that is in the same network segment with the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is an integer
from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address is unique and cannot be the same as any of the existing
IP addresses.

Step 11 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.

CAUTION
When configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct connection, do not
configure the gateway. Otherwise the configured gateway may lead to a failed connection. If
the U2000 server has more than one network cards, select the corresponding local connection
for the network card connected to the subrack.

Step 12 Click OK.

----End

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

2 Quick Guide

About This Chapter

The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT and the
U2000.
The U2000 is an integrated management platform for all Huawei equipment. It can centrally
manage transport equipment, access equipment, and IP equipment (including routers, security
equipment, and Metro Ethernet equipment). With powerful management functions at the NE
and network layers, the U2000 is the major future-oriented network management product and
solution for Huawei equipment. In the telecommunication management network (TMN)
hierarchy, the U2000 is located between the element management layer and network
management layer, and supports all functions of the NE and network layers.
The Web LCT is an element management system (EMS) in an optical transport network. In the
TMN, the Web LCT is located at the NE layer. Based on the browser/server architecture, the
Web LCT allows you to perform all operations of NE-level configuration and maintenance. The
Web LCT accesses a local NE through a LAN or a serial port, and accesses a remote NE over
data communications channels (DCCs).
2.1 U2000 Quick Guide
The U2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. You are
recommended to start or shut down the U2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in
order not to affect other users who are operating the U2000.
2.2 Web LCT Quick Guide
The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT.
2.3 Entering the Common Views
This task describes how to display the common views of the network management system (NMS)
and functions of the views.
2.4 Using Online Help
Online Help provides help information about the U2000.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

2.1 U2000 Quick Guide


The U2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. You are
recommended to start or shut down the U2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in
order not to affect other users who are operating the U2000.

Context
You are recommended to start the computer and the U2000 application according to the
following sequence:

l Start the computer.


l Start the U2000 server.
l Start the U2000 client.

You are recommended to shut down the U2000 application and the computer according to the
following sequence:

l Exit the U2000 client.


l Stop the U2000 server.
l Shut down the computer.

2.1.1 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows)


Three steps are required to start the U2000 server: power on the server safely, start the database,
and start the U2000 server processes.

Starting the Database


The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. This topic describes how to start
the database on the Windows single-server system.

Prerequisites
The OS must have been started.

Context
Generally, the database starts along with the OS.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights.

Step 2 Choose Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Service Manager to check whether
Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running.
The SQL Server Service Manager dialog box is displayed.

If Start/Continue is dimmed, Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Step 3 If Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is not running, click Start/Continue.

----End

Starting the U2000 Server Processes


You can log in to the U2000 to manage the network only after starting the computer where the
U2000 is installed and the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to start the
U2000 server processes on the Windows single-server system.

Prerequisites
The OS on the computer where the U2000 server is installed must be running properly, and the
database must have been started.

Context
Generally, the U2000 server processes start along with the OS.

During the installation of the U2000 software, only one default NMS user, admin, is provided.
The admin user is a U2000 administrator, who has the highest rights of the U2000 system.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights.

Step 2 In Windows Task Manager, view the startup information about the U2000 server processes.
If imapmrb.exe, imapwatchdog.exe, imapsysd.exe, imapeventmgr.exe,
imap_sysmonitor.exe, ResourceMonitor.exe, imapsvcd.exe, EmfGnlDevDm.exe, and
imapPortTrunkSvc.exe are displayed in the process list, the U2000 server processes have
started.

Step 3 If the U2000 server processes have not started, choose Start > Programs > Network
Management System > U2000 Server > U2000 Server or click the shortcut icon on the desktop
to start the U2000 server.
Starting the U2000 server processes takes about 3 minutes.

Step 4 Choose Start > Programs > Network Management System > U2000 System Monitor or click
the shortcut icon on the desktop to start the U2000 System Monitor client.

Step 5 In the Login dialog box, enter a user name and a password to access the System Monitor client
window. The user name is admin, and the password is empty by default. You are required to
change the password at the first login.
NOTE

Two data transmission modes are available: Common and Security(SSL). You can run a command on the
server to query the data transmission mode. The default data transmission mode is Common.

Step 6 Check whether the U2000 processes start properly. The processes for which the start mode is
manual must be started manually.
l If the U2000 processes for which the start mode is automatic start successfully, the U2000
runs properly.
l If any process does not start, right-click the process and choose Start Process from the
shortcut menu.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

l If the U2000 runs abnormally, contact Huawei engineers.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
The network management system maintenance suite is applicable to U2000 commissioning,
maintenance, and redeployment. Generally, the network management system maintenance
suite server processes start along with the OS.

In Windows Task Manager, check whether msdaemon.exe and msserver.exe are listed.
l If the two processes are listed, the MSuite server has started.
l If the two processes are not listed, the MSuite server does not start. Navigate to the C:
\HWENGR\engineering directory, double-click startserver.bat to start the MSuite
server.

2.1.2 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Solaris)


Three steps are required to start the U2000 server: power on the server safely, start the database,
and start the U2000 server processes.

Starting the Database


The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. This topic describes how to start
the database on the Solaris single-server system.

Prerequisites
The OS must have been started.

Context
Generally, the database starts along with the OS.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the sybase user.
TIP

Run the su - sybase command to switch to the sybase user.

Step 2 Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:
$ ps -ef | grep sybase

Information similar to the following is displayed:


sybase 4848 4847 0 May 18 ? 167:11 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/data
server -sDBSVR -d/opt/sybase/data/lv_master -e/opt
sybase 5250 5248 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/back
upserver -SDBSVR_back -e/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/insta
sybase 4847 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-1
5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR
sybase 5248 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-1
5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back
...

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

NOTE

The database is running if the displayed information contains /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/


RUN_DBSVR and /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back.

Step 3 Run the following commands to start the Sybase database if it is not running:
# su - sybase
$ cd /opt/sybase/ASE*/install
$ ./startserver -f ./RUN_DBSVR &
$ ./startserver -f ./RUN_DBSVR_back &

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:
$ ps -ef | grep sybase

Information similar to the following is displayed:


sybase 4848 4847 0 May 18 ? 167:11 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/data
server -sDBSVR -d/opt/sybase/data/lv_master -e/opt
sybase 5250 5248 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/back
upserver -SDBSVR_back -e/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/insta
sybase 4847 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-1
5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR
sybase 5248 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-1
5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back
...

NOTE

The database is running if the displayed information contains /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/


RUN_DBSVR and /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back.

Starting the U2000 Server Processes


You can log in to the U2000 to manage the network only after starting the computer where the
U2000 is installed and the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to start the
U2000 server processes on the Solaris single-server system.

Prerequisites
The OS on the computer where the U2000 server is installed must be running properly, and the
database must have been started.

Context
Generally, the U2000 server processes start along with the OS.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the nmsuser user.
Step 2 Run the following command to check whether the U2000 is running:
$ daem_ps

Information similar to the following is displayed:


nmsuser 27069 1 0 10:31:39 ? 1:39 imapmrb
nmsuser 27079 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:00 imapwatchdog -cmd start

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

nmsuser 27075 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:50 imapsysd -cmd start


nmsuser 27086 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:09 imapeventmgr
nmsuser 23679 1 1 17:57:06 pts/8 0:02 imap_sysmonitor -cmd start
nmsuser 27116 1 0 10:31:40 ? 0:52 ResourceMonitor -cmd start

NOTE

The U2000 is running if the displayed information contains imap_sysmonitor -cmd start.

Step 3 Run the following command to start the U2000 if it is not running:
$ cd /opt/U2000/server/bin
$ ./startnms.sh

Step 4 View the running status of each process through the System Monitor as user nmsuser to log in
to the server GUI, as follows:

CAUTION
If you cannot log in to the GUI of the server, run the svc_adm -cmd status command to view
the status of processes as user nmsuser.

1. On the desktop of the OS, double-click the U2000 System Monitor shortcut icon.
NOTE

The default ACL range is the entire network segment. It is recommended that you set the ACL
restriction range based on the security requirements. .
2. In the dialog box that is displayed, enter the U2000 user name and password (to open the
System Monitor window). The default password of user admin is blank. You must change
the default password during first-time login.
NOTE

There are two data transmission modes, namely, Normal and Security(SSL). You can run the
ssl_adm -cmd query command to query data transmission modes on the server. The ssl_adm -cmd
query command must be run as user nmsuser in Solaris and SUSE Linux OS. The default data
transmission mode is Normal.

The U2000 is functioning properly if it can initiate in automatic startup mode, indicating
that the U2000 is functioning properly.
If a process cannot start, right-click the process and choose Start the Process from the
shortcut menu.
If the U2000 works properly, contact Huawei engineers.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
The network management system maintenance suite is used to debug, maintain, and redeploy
the U2000. Generally, the network management system maintenance suite server processes start
along with the OS. If the processes do not start, run the following command:
$ su - root
password: password_of_the_root_user
# cd /opt/HWENGR/engineering
# ./startserver.sh

Run the following command to switch back to the nmsuser user:

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

# exit

Run the following command to check whether the network management system maintenance
suite process is started:
$ ps -ef | grep java
root 19913 19907 0 04:04:09 pts/1 0:00 grep java
...
root 18382 18311 0 03:42:33 pts/2 12:20 /opt/HWNMSJRE/jre_sol/bin/java -
server -Dequinox.conf=engineering/conf/installE

NOTE

If the displayed information contains /opt/HWNMSJRE/jre_sol/bin/java -server, it indicates that the


network management system maintenance suite process is started.

2.1.3 Starting the U2000 Server (HA System, Windows)


Three steps are required to start the U2000 server: power on the server safely, start the database,
and start the U2000 server processes.

Starting the Database


The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. This topic describes how to start
the database on the Windows HA system.

Prerequisites
The OS must have been started.

Procedure
Step 1 In the high availability system, log in to the OS as the user who has administrator rights.
Step 2 Start the VCS client.
1. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster
Manager - Java Console to start the VCS client.
2. Choose File > New Cluster.
3. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK.
4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client.
Then, click OK.
Step 3 Choose AppService from the navigation tree and click the Resources tab. Then, right-click
AppService-SQLServer2000 and choose Online > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the
dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.

----End

Starting the U2000 Server Processes


You can log in to the U2000 to manage the network only after starting the computer where the
U2000 is installed and the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to start the
U2000 server processes on the Windows HA system.

Prerequisites
The OS on the computer where the U2000 server is installed must be running properly, and the
database must have been started.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Context
During the installation of the U2000 software, only one default NMS user, admin, is provided.
The admin user is a U2000 administrator, who has the highest rights of the U2000 system.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights.

Step 2 Run the following command to manually start the U2000 processes:
1. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster
Manager - Java Console to start a VCS client.
2. Choose File > New Cluster.
3. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK.
4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client.
Then, click OK.
5. Right-click AppService in the navigation tree and choose Online > host_name from the
shortcut menu.
6. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
The network management system maintenance suite is applicable to U2000 commissioning,
maintenance, and redeployment. Generally, the network management system maintenance
suite server processes start along with the OS.

In Windows Task Manager, check whether msdaemon.exe and msserver.exe are listed.
l If the two processes are listed, the MSuite server has started.
l If the two processes are not listed, the MSuite server does not start. Navigate to the C:
\HWENGR\engineering directory, double-click startserver.bat to start the MSuite
server.

2.1.4 Starting the U2000 Server in a High Availability System


(Solaris)
Four steps are required to start the U2000 server in a high availability system (Solaris): power
on the server safely, check the high availability system, start the database, and start the U2000
server processes.

Starting the Database


The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. This topic describes how to start
the database on the HA system (Solaris).

Prerequisites
l The OS must have been started.
l The VCS service must have started along with the OS and the disk must function properly.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Perform the following operations to start the Sybase database service in the HA system:
l GUI mode:
1. Log in to the primary site as user root.
2. Run the following command to start the VCS client:
# hagui &

3. Choose File > New Cluster from the main menu. In the window that is displayed, enter
the IP address of the server and click OK.
4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password of the VCS
client. Click OK.
5. Expand the AppService node in the navigation tree, and expand the SybaseBk node.
Right-click BackupServer and check whether the Enabled check box is selected. If it
is not selected, select it and choose Online > host_name from the shortcut menu.
6. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
Wait until BackupServer and DatabaseServer on the Resources tab page are
available, which indicates that the Sybase database service is running.
l CLI mode:
1. Log in to the primary site as user root.
2. Run the following command to start the Sybase database service:
# hares -online BackupServer -sys hostname

----End

Starting the U2000 Server Processes


You can log in to the U2000 to manage the network only after starting the computer where the
U2000 is installed and the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to start the
U2000 server processes on the Solaris HA system.

Prerequisites
The OS on the computer where the U2000 server is installed must be running properly, and the
database must have been started.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the primary site as user root.

Step 2 Start the U2000 server processes.


l GUI mode:
1. Open a terminal window, run the following command:
# hagui&

NOTE
If the login window fails to be displayed and the terminal displays a message indicating that the
current status is "STALE_ADMIN_WAIT", run the # hasys -force host name of node command.
2. Click Connect to Cluster name.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

NOTE
If you are logging in to the VCS for the first time, you need to create a new Cluster.
a. Click File > New Cluster.
b. Enter the IP address of application network.
c. Click OK.
3. Enter User Name and Password.
NOTE
The default user name of the VCS is admin and the password is password.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Cluster Explorer window, right-click the AppService resource group in the
navigation tree and choose Online > primary from the shortcut menu to start the Sybase
process and U2000 server process.
TIP
Click the Resources tab to view the start status of each resource.
Normally, on the Status tab page, Online is displayed for State in the Group Status
on Member Systems area on the active site, and Online on primary is displayed for
Status in the Resource Status area.
NOTE

l In actual configuration, use the actual host name.


l If a fault has occurred during start of the AppService process, right-click AppService and choose
clear fault from the shortcut menu to clear the fault. Then, choose Online > host_name to start
the AppService process.
6. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
l CLI mode:
# hagrp -online AppService -sys hostname

----End

2.1.5 Logging In to the U2000 Client


Log in to a U2000 using the client, and then perform management operations in the GUI of the
U2000 client.

Prerequisites
Before logging in to the U2000 client, ensure that the following conditions are met:

l The U2000 processes are started.


l The network communication between the U2000 client and the U2000 is available.
NOTE

Run the ping peer_IP_address command to check network communication.


– In a single-server system (centralized), the IP address is the system IP address of the
server.
– In a single-server system (distributed), the IP address is the system IP address of the
master server.
– In a high availability system (centralized), the IP address is the IP address of NMS
application network in the active site server.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

– In a high availability system (distributed), the IP address is the IP address of NMS


application network in the master server of active site.
l The ports used between the U2000 client and the U2000 are opened by the firewall.
l The IP address of the client must be contained in the access control list (ACL) that is
configured on the U2000.
NOTE

The default ACL range is the entire network segment. It is recommended that you set the ACL
restriction range based on the security requirements.
l The legitimate U2000 user account and password must be allocated.
l U2000 Licenses have been correctly loaded to the server.

Context
By default, after you enter an incorrect password for three consecutive times, the user account
that you use is locked by the U2000. The super user admin can unlock the account of a common
user. In addition, the system can automatically unlock the account in 30 minutes.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS where the client program is installed.
l On Windows OS, log in to the OS as user administrator.
l On Solaris OS, log in to the GUI as user nmsuser.
Step 2 On the OS desktop, double-click the U2000 Client shortcut icon. The Login dialog box is
displayed.
TIP

l In the case of a Windows OS, you can double-click the startup_all_global.bat file in the D:\U2000
\client directory to start the client.
l In the case of a Solaris OS, you can run the command of ./startup_all_global.sh in the /opt/U2000/
client directory to start the client.

Step 3 In the Server drop-down list, select the server to be logged in to. Then, set User Name and
Password to the valid values, and click Login.
l If the intended server is not configured, perform the following operations to add a server:
1. Click the ... button. In the Server List dialog box, click Add.
2. In the Add Server Information dialog box, set the parameters of the U2000 server to
be added, and then click OK.

Table 2-1 Server parameter settings


Parameter Settings

Name It is recommended that you set this parameter to the IP address


for login or the related host name.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Parameter Settings

Server Name (or It is recommended that you set this parameter to an IP address.
IP Address) l In a single-server system (centralized), the IP address is the
system IP address of the server.
l In a single-server system (distributed), the IP address is the
system IP address of the master server.
l In a high availability system (centralized), the IP address is
the IP address of NMS application network in the active site
server.
l In a high availability system (distributed), the IP address is the
IP address of NMS application network in the master server
of active site.

Port There are two data transmission modes, namely, Normal and
Security(SSL). By default, port 31037 is used in Normal mode
and port 31039 is used in Security(SSL) mode.

Mode There are two data transmission modes, namely, Normal and
Security(SSL). You can run the ssl_adm -cmd query command
to query data transmission modes on the server. The ssl_adm -
cmd query command must be run as user nmsuser in Solaris and
SUSE Linux OS. The default data transmission mode is
Normal.
NOTE
l If the client and server applications are on the same host and the server
uses the SSL mode, then the client can use the Normal or SSL mode.
The client can only use the Normal mode if the server uses the
Normal mode.
l If the client and server applications are not on the same host, the client
can log in to the server only when it uses the same mode as the server.

3. In the Server List dialog box, select a record from the record list. Then, click OK.
l When you log in to the U2000 client, if the system detects that the local version is earlier
than the server version, a prompt is displayed, asking you whether to upgrade the client.
– Click Yes to upgrade the client.
– Click No to log in to the client.
----End

Result
After the login to the U2000 client is successful, the U2000 client obtains related data from the
U2000.

2.1.6 Shutting Down U2000 Clients


You must ensure that all U2000 clients are shut down before you shut down the U2000 server.

Prerequisites
The U2000 clients must be started properly.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK.


If certain operations are performed on the Main Topology but not saved, a prompt is displayed,
asking you whether to save them.

----End

2.1.7 Shutting Down the MDS 6630 Server

Procedure
Step 1 Stop all running clients.

----End

Stopping the U2000 Server Processes


Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop the
U2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system time
of the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes how
to stop the U2000 server processes on the Windows single-server system.

Prerequisites
Exit all running U2000 clients.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights.

Step 2 In Windows Task Manager, view the startup information about the U2000 server processes.
If imapmrb.exe, imapwatchdog.exe, imapsysd.exe, imapeventmgr.exe,
imap_sysmonitor.exe, ResourceMonitor.exe, imapsvcd.exe, EmfGnlDevDm.exe, and
imapPortTrunkSvc.exe are displayed in the process list, the U2000 server processes have
started.

Step 3 In the U2000 software installation directory, for example, D:\U2000\server\bin, run
stopnms.bat to stop U2000 server processes.

----End

Result
In Windows Task Manager, click the Processes tab and check that imapmrb.exe,
imapwatchdog.exe, imapsysd.exe, imapeventmgr.exe, imap_sysmonitor.exe,
ResourceMonitor.exe, imapsvcd.exe, EmfGnlDevDm.exe, and imapPortTrunkSvc.exe
have been stopped.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Shutting Down the Database


The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down the
database, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the database
on the Windows single-server system.

Prerequisites
The U2000 server processes must have been stopped.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights.
Step 2 Choose Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Service Manager to check whether
Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running.
The SQL Server Service Manager dialog box is displayed.
If Start/Continue is dimmed, Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running.
Step 3 Choose Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Service Manager.

Step 4 In the dialog box that is displayed, click .


Step 5 In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.

----End

2.1.8 Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System,


Solaris)
Three steps are required to shut down the U2000 server: stop the U2000 server processes, shut
down the database, and power off the server safely.

Stopping the U2000 Server Processes


Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop the
U2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system time
of the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes how
to stop the U2000 server processes on the Solaris single-server system.

Prerequisites
Exit all running U2000 clients.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the nmsuser user.
Step 2 To check the running status of the U2000 process, run the following command:
$ daem_ps

Information similar to the following is displayed:


nmsuser 27069 1 0 10:31:39 ? 1:39 imapmrb
nmsuser 27079 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:00 imapwatchdog -cmd start

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

nmsuser 27075 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:50 imapsysd -cmd start


nmsuser 27086 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:09 imapeventmgr
nmsuser 23679 1 1 17:57:06 pts/8 0:02 imap_sysmonitor -cmd start
nmsuser 27116 1 0 10:31:40 ? 0:52 ResourceMonitor -cmd start

NOTE

The U2000 is running if the displayed information contains imap_sysmonitor -cmd start.

Step 3 Run the following commands to stop U2000 if it is running:


$ cd /opt/U2000/server/bin
$ ./stopnms.sh

----End

Result
Run the following command to check the running status of the U2000 process:
$ daem_ps

NOTE

The process is stopped if the displayed information is empty.

Shutting Down the Database


The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down the
database, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the database
on the Solaris single-server system.

Prerequisites
The U2000 server processes must have been stopped.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the sybase user.
TIP

Run the su - sybase command to switch to the sybase user.

Step 2 Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:
$ ps -ef | grep sybase

Information similar to the following is displayed:


sybase 4848 4847 0 May 18 ? 167:11 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/data
server -sDBSVR -d/opt/sybase/data/lv_master -e/opt
sybase 5250 5248 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/back
upserver -SDBSVR_back -e/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/insta
sybase 4847 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-1
5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR
sybase 5248 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-1
5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back
...

NOTE

The database is running if the displayed information contains /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/


RUN_DBSVR and /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back.

Step 3 Run the following commands to stop the Sybase database if it is running:
$ su - sybase

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

$ . /opt/sybase/SYBASE.sh
$ cd /opt/sybase/OCS*/bin
$ ./isql -SDBSVR -Usa -PChangeme123
1> shutdown SYB_BACKUP
2> go
1> shutdown
2> go

NOTE

l Leave a space between the dot (.) and the command /opt/sybase/SYBASE.sh.
l In the ./isql -SDBSVR -Usa -PChangeme123 command, Changeme123 specifies the password for the
sa user of the Sybase database.

----End

Result
Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:
$ ps -ef | grep sybase

NOTE

The database is stoped if the displayed information does not contain /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/
RUN_DBSVR and /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back.

2.1.9 Shutting Down the High Availability System (Windows)


This topic describes how to shut down a system. Do not power off a U2000 when it is properly
managing NEs. The U2000 only needs to be shut down in special circumstances, such as
switching the power supply.

Procedure
Step 1 Stop all running U2000 clients.

Step 2 On the primary site, do as follows to stop the U2000 processes:


1. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster
Manager - Java Console to start the VCS client.
2. Choose File > New Cluster. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in the following figure.
3. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK.
4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client.
Then, click OK.
5. Right-click AppService in the navigation tree and choose Offline > host_name from the
shortcut menu.
6. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
Wait patiently. If all the resources on the Resources tab page turn grey, it indicates that the NMS
processes are stopped.

Step 3 Log in to the server of the active site and run the following commands to stop the VCS service:

C:\> hastop -all -force

In the Task Manager, check whether the had.exe process exists. If yes, right-click the process
and stop it.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Step 4 Log in to the server of the standby site and perform the preceding step to stop the VCS service
on the server of the standby site.

Step 5 Shut down the OS of the standby site.


1. Choose Start > Shut Down.
2. In the dialog box that is displayed, select Shut Down. Then, click OK.

Step 6 Shut down the OS of the active site.


1. Choose Start > Shut Down.
2. In the dialog box that is displayed, select Shut Down. Then, click OK.

----End

Stopping the U2000 Server Processes


Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop the
U2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system time
of the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes how
to stop the U2000 server processes on the Windows HA system.

Prerequisites
Exit all running U2000 clients.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights.

Step 2 End the U2000 processes of the Veritas high availability system.
1. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster
Manager - Java Console to start the VCS client.
2. Choose File > New Cluster.
3. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK.
4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client.
Then, click OK.
5. Choose AppService from the navigation tree and click the Resources tab. Then, right-click
NMSServer and choose Offline > host_name from the shortcut menu.
6. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.

----End

Shutting Down the Database


The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down the
database, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the database
on the Windows HA system.

Prerequisites
The U2000 server processes must have been stopped.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Procedure
Step 1 In the high availability system, log in to the OS as the user who has administrator rights.

Step 2 Start the VCS client.


1. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster
Manager - Java Console to start the VCS client.
2. Choose File > New Cluster.
3. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK.
4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client.
Then, click OK.
Step 3 Choose AppService from the navigation tree and click the Resources tab. Then, right-click
NMSServer and choose Offline > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is
displayed, click Yes.
Step 4 After the NMSServer resource is stopped, right-click AppService-SQLServer2000 and choose
Offline > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.

----End

2.1.10 Shutting Down the U2000 Server in a High Availability


System (Solaris)
Four steps are required to shut down the U2000 server in a high availability system (Solaris):
stop the U2000 server processes, shut down the database, stop the VCS service, and power off
the server safely.

Stopping the U2000 Server Processes


Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop the
U2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system time
of the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes how
to stop the U2000 server processes on the Solaris HA system.

Prerequisites
Exit all running U2000 clients.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the active site as the root user.

Step 2 Stop the U2000 server processes.


l GUI mode:
1. Open a terminal window, run the following command:
# hagui&

NOTE
If the login window fails to be displayed and the terminal displays a message indicating that the
current status is "STALE_ADMIN_WAIT", run the # hasys -force host name of node command.
2. Click Connect to Cluster name.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

NOTE
If you are logging in to the VCS for the first time, you need to create a new Cluster.
a. Click File > New Cluster.
b. Enter the IP address of application network.
c. Click OK.
3. Enter User Name and Password.
NOTE
The default user name of the VCS is admin and the password is password.
4. Click OK.
5. Choose AppService from the navigation tree.
6. Click the Resources tab. Right-click NMSServer and choose Offline > Host name
from the shortcut menu.
Wait about 1 minute. If the NMSServer icon changes to grey, the U2000 processes
have been stopped.
l CLI mode:
# hagrp -offline AppService -sys hostname

----End

Shutting Down the Database


The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down the
database, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the database
on the Solaris HA system.

Prerequisites
The U2000 server processes must have been stopped.

Procedure
Step 1 Perform the following operations to disable the Sybase database service at the primary site in
the HA system:
NOTE

By default, the Sybase database service at the secondary site is not running.
l GUI mode:
1. Log in to the primary site as user root.
2. Run the following command to start the VCS client at the primary site:
# hagui &
3. In the Cluster Monitor window, click the server record in the list.
4. In the dialog box that is displayed, enter the user name and the password of the VCS,
and click OK.
NOTE

The default user of the VCS is admin and the default password is password.
5. On the VCS client of the primary site, right-click the NMSServer node and choose
Offline > hostname from the shortcut menu.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

6. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.


7. Right-click the BackupServer node and choose Offline > hostname from the shortcut
menu.
8. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
9. Right-click the DatabaseServer node and choose Offline > hostname from the shortcut
menu.
10. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
l CLI mode:
1. Log in to the primary site as user root.
2. Run the following command to shut down the U2000:
# hares -offline NMSServer -sys hostname
3. Run the following command to disable the Sybase database service:
# hares -offline BackupServer -sys hostname
# hares -offline DatabaseServer -sys hostname

Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database service is disabled:
# ps -ef | grep sybase
If the following message is displayed, the Sybase database service has been disabled:
root 9629 14603 0 07:46:52 pts/3 0:00 grep sybase

----End

Stopping the VCS Service


This topic describes how to stop the VCS service.

Prerequisites
The U2000 and database must have been shut down.

Context
Before powering off the server safely, manually stop the VCS service; otherwise, the server may
fail to shut down properly.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS on the server as the root user.
Step 2 Run the following command to stop the VCS service:
# hastop -all -force

----End

2.2 Web LCT Quick Guide


The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

2.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to NEs


To configure and manage NEs by using the Web LCT, first connect the Web LCT to the NEs
with Ethernet cables or serial port cables.

Procedure
l Connect the Web LCT to the NEs by using Ethernet cables.
1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Web LCT computer.
2. Route the cable to the equipment side and connect the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet
cable to the NMS interface of the equipment panel.
NOTE

The IP address of the NMS and the IP address of the equipment must belong to the same network
segment.
l Connect the Web LCT to the NEs over the DCN.
1. Connect the Web LCT computer to the DCN using an Ethernet cable.
2. Connect one end of another Ethernet cable to the NMS interface of the equipment
panel and connect the other end of the line to the DCN.
l Connect the Web LCT to the NEs by using the RS 232 serial port cable.
1. Connect the serial port cable to the Web LCT computer.
2. Route the cable to the equipment and connect the RS 232 connector of the serial port
cable to the RS 232 interface of the equipment panel.
NOTE

For the location of the RS 232 serial interface and Ethernet interface on the equipment, see the
Hardware Description for your equipment.

----End

2.2.2 Starting the Web LCT


You need to start the Web LCT before logging in to configure and manage NEs.

Prerequisites
The Web LCT computer and equipment must be correctly connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Start the Web LCT computer.
Step 2 Double-click the shortcut icon Start Web LCT on the desktop. The Web LCT starts and the
login page for the Web LCT is displayed.
Step 3 Enter Password.
NOTE

By default, the User Name is admin, and the initial Password is admin. To protect the Web LCT from
illegal logins, immediately change the initial password and keep the new one.

Step 4 Click Login. The NE List is displayed.

----End

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

2.2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT


You can log in to the Web LCT server through Internet Explorer without installing the server
on the local computer.

Prerequisites
l The Web LCT server must be started correctly.
l The Internet Explorer pop-up blocker must be turned off.

Procedure
Step 1 Open Internet Explorer.
Step 2 Enter the IP address of the Web LCT server in the address field. The Web LCT Login dialog
box is displayed.
NOTE

Enter the IP address of the server, for example, http://10.70.73.1:11080/WebLCT. The four octets
10.70.73.1 is the IP address of the server computer and 11080 is the port number.
NOTE

The IP address of the Web LCT server is case-sensitive. Ensure that WebLCT is entered correctly.

Step 3 Enter the Password.


NOTE

By default, the User Name is admin, and the initial Password is admin. To protect the Web LCT from
illegal logins, immediately change this password and keep the new one.
If a user account is used to log in to the NE with incorrect passwords for consecutive five times, the user
account is locked and will be unlocked 15 minutes after the last failed login. Two login attempts are
considered as consecutive if the interval between the two attempts is within three minutes.
The unlocking operation cannot be performed through the NMS. Only the system can (automatically)
unlock the user account.
Here locking means that the user account of a specified NE is locked and the other NEs are not affected.

Step 4 Click Login. The NE List is displayed.


NOTE

An NE supports the login of a single Web LCT user at a time. Concurrent logins of several Web LCT users
on an NE is not supported on an NE.

----End

2.2.4 Shutting Down the Web LCT


You are recommended to shut down the Web LCT by strictly observing the following procedure.

Prerequisites
The Web LCT must be started normally.

Procedure

Step 1 Click to close the NE Explorer.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Step 2 Click to close the NE list.

Step 3 Double-click the shortcut icon for Web LCT shutdown to stop the Tomcat service.

----End

2.3 Entering the Common Views


This task describes how to display the common views of the network management system (NMS)
and functions of the views.

2.3.1 Opening the Main Topology on the U2000


On the Main Topology, you can manage topologies, protection subnets, and trails.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with " Monitor Group" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Procedure
l To open the Main Topology, log in to the U2000 client.
l Choose Window > Main Topology from the Main Menu.

----End

2.3.2 NE List on the Web LCT


NE List is the main user interface of the Web LCT. The Web LCT performs the following NE
management operations through NE List: adding NEs, logging in to NEs, logging out of NEs,
deleting NEs, browsing system logs, and setting time format.

NOTE

NE List is refreshed periodically and the NE information is automatically refreshed every five seconds.
The Web LCT supports the focus display function. After the mouse cursor resides on a shortcut icon for
about two seconds, the description of the shortcut icon is displayed.
After the Web LCT client is successfully started, the NE List window is displayed.
The Web LCT supports backup of the NE database to the SCC board so that the configuration data of the
NE can be stored.

User Interface
Figure 2-1 shows the NE List window of the Web LCT.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Figure 2-1 NE List

2.3.3 Opening the NE Explorer


The NE Explorer is the key interface for the U2000 to configure a single station. After opening
the NE Explorer, you can configure, manage and maintain each NE, board or port in a
hierarchical manner.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with " Monitor Group" authority or higher.

Background Information
You can open a maximum of five NE Explorer windows at the same time.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000


l Double-click an optical NE on the Main Topology. In the displayed window, right-click
an NE in the left-hand pane and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.
NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800/6800, the icon of the NE can be directly placed on the Main Topology.

Double-click the NE icon and then click to display the NE Explorer.

----End

Procedure on the Web LCT


l In the NE List, select an NE and click NE Explorer, or double-click the NE in the NE
List. Then, the NE Explorer is displayed.

----End

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

2.3.4 Opening the NE Panel


The NE Panel displays subracks and boards on an NE. The color of the icon indicates the current
state of the component. On the NMS, the NE Panel is a key user interface for configuring,
monitoring, and maintaining equipment.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000


l In the Main Topology, double-click an NE icon and select the NE in the pane on the left
side. The pane on the right side displays the NE Panel by default.
----End

Procedure on the Web LCT


l Right-click the NE and choose NE Explorer. The pane on the right side displays the NE
Panel by default.
----End

User Interface
NE Panel is product-specific. Figure 2-2 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
Figure 2-3 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Figure 2-4 shows the NE Panel
of the OptiX OSN 6800. Figure 2-5 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 3800.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Figure 2-2 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Figure 2-3 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

Figure 2-4 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 6800

Figure 2-5 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 3800

2.4 Using Online Help


Online Help provides help information about the U2000.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Help > Help Topics from the Main Menu. The Online Help page is displayed.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide

TIP

When using the U2000 client, press the F1 key to quickly display the related Online Help page.

----End

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

3 Commissioning and Configuration


Procedure During Deployment

This section describes the general commissioning procedures.


The commissioning procedures for the equipment can be divided into two parts: optical power
commissioning and network commissioning.
l Optical power commissioning procedures individually commission the optical power
values of NEs and boards based on the optical signal flow. They also remove the abnormal
attenuation of lines or boards based on the requirements of optical power, and the gain and
insertion losses of the boards.
l Network commissioning procedures include the commissioning protection function,
testing bit errors, and other functional commissioning operations at the network level.
Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 provides the general commissioning procedures.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

Figure 3-1 General commissioning procedures for OptiX OSN 8800/6800


Installation Installing the Creating OCh
Creating an NE Creating Fibers trails using the
Equipment
trail search
function
Creating an Checking
Checking the
Optical Network Network-Wide
Installation Configuring
Element Software
Version the ROADM
Powering On Uploading the
and Checking NE Data Setting
the Equipment Manually
Extended ECC
Setting Up Setting NE ID Communication
Optical Paths and IP
Setting
Performance
Synchronizing Monitoring
Configuring NE
the NE Time Parameters of
and Network
with the NMS an NE

Commissioning
Optical Power
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the Configuring Port
Service on
Service of the Board
Configuration
Configuration Guide
Configuring the
& WDM
Commissioning Protection
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Feature on
WDM Feature
Feature
Description
Commissioning
the System

Testing Bit
Errors

Backing Up the
: Mandatory
NE Data : Optional

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

Figure 3-2 General commissioning procedures for OptiX OSN 3800

Installation Installing the Creating OCh


Creating an NE Creating Fibers trails using the
Equipment
trail search
function
Creating an Checking
Checking the
Optical Network Network-Wide
Installation
Element Software
Version
Powering On Uploading the
and Checking NE Data Setting
the Equipment Manually
Extended ECC
Setting Up Setting NE ID Communication
Optical Paths and IP
Setting
Performance
Synchronizing Monitoring
Configuring NE
the NE Time Parameters of
and Network
with the NMS an NE

Commissioning
Optical Power
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the Configuring Port
Service on
Service of the Board
Configuration
Configuration Guide
Configuring the
&
WDM
Commissioning Protection
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Feature on
WDM Feature
Feature
Description
Commissioning
the System

Testing Bit
Errors

Backing Up the
: Mandatory
NE Data : Optional

You can perform the commissioning and configuration during deployment of the equipment by
using either the iManager U2000 (U2000 for short) or the OptiX iManager U2000 Web LCT
(Web LCT for short). All the operations that can be performed on the Web LCT can be performed
on the U2000. Compared with U2000, the Web LCT has lower requirements on the computer
hardware and can be started quickly.

Table 3-1 lists the tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment.

Table 3-1 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment

No. Task Mandato Tool


ry/
Optional

1 Creating NEs in Batches. Mandatory U2000 or Web


LCT

2 Creating Optical NEs. Mandatory U2000

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

No. Task Mandato Tool


ry/
Optional

3 Uploading the NE Data. Mandatory U2000

4 Setting NE ID and IP. Mandatory U2000 or Web


LCT

5 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web Mandatory U2000 or Web


LCT Server Manually. LCT

6 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of Mandatory U2000 or Web


an NE. LCT

7 Setting Manually Extended ECC Optional U2000


Communication. Perform this task when the
network uses HWECC for communication and
more than four Huawei equipment NEs use the
extended ECC for communication.

Configuring IP over DCC. Perform this task when Optional U2000


the network uses IP over DCC for communication.

Configuring OSI over DCC. Perform this task when Optional U2000
the network uses OSI over DCC for communication.

8 Checking Network-Wide Software Version. Optional U2000

9 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode. Mandatory U2000


Perform this task on the U2000. on the
U2000

10 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search. Perform this Mandatory U2000


task on the U2000. on the
U2000

11 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross- Optional U2000 or Web


Connection. Perform this task when ROADM according LCT
stations are configured on the actual network. to the
network

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

No. Task Mandato Tool


ry/
Optional

12 Commission optical power by using one of the Mandatory U2000 or Web


following methods as required: LCT
l Commissioning Optical Power on Site
l Remotely Commissioning Optical Power
l Automatic Commissioning
NOTE
This document uses a 40-channel system as an example
to describe optical power commissioning. The optical
power commissioning methods for an 80-channel system
are similar. The main difference is that the 40-channel
system and 80-channel system have different
requirements on nominal single-wavelength optical
power and single-wavelength incident optical power for
OA boards.
NOTE
See Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based
on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System to commission
optical power of a 40 Gbit/s system.
See Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of
the Coherent Transmission System to commission
optical power of the Coherent Transmission System.

13 Configuring Boards. Mandatory U2000 or Web


LCT

14 Configuring Services. Mandatory U2000

15 Configuring System Features. Mandatory U2000

16 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Mandatory U2000 or Web


Removing Abnormal Alarms. LCT

17 Testing Protection Switching. Mandatory U2000

18 Testing Data Features. Mandatory U2000

19 Testing System Features. Mandatory U2000

20 Testing Ethernet Service Channels. Mandatory U2000

21 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System and Optional U2000 or Web


Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS LCT
System.

22 Testing Orderwire Functions. Optional U2000 or Web


LCT

23 Testing Bit Errors. Mandatory OTN analyzer or


SDH analyzer

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment

No. Task Mandato Tool


ry/
Optional

24 Checking the entire network against the Checklist Mandatory U2000 or Web
for Commissioning During Deployment. Ensure LCT
that the network configurations are correct.

25 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Mandatory U2000 or Web


Board. LCT

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4 Configuring NE and Network

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to configure NEs and networks.

4.1 Creating NEs in Batches


When the U2000/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs that
communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to which
the IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is quicker and
more accurate than manual creation. Therefore, the method of creating NEs in batches is
recommended.
4.2 Creating Optical NEs
The U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for management. There
are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA and
WDM_OTM.
4.3 Logging In to an NE
On the U2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.
4.4 Uploading the NE Data
By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network
management system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that you configure the NE data by
uploading the data.
4.5 Setting NE ID and IP
ECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word for searching
on the U2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you must assign a
unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision is caused.
In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or expansion process, if you
need to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can change the NE ID on the
U2000.
4.6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually
For NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time is consistent
with the U2000/Web LCT server time, so that the U2000/Web LCT can correctly record the
time that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with the time of
the U2000/Web LCT server.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4.7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE


By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance
monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of
the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by
maintenance personnel.
4.8 Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication
When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be
used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE takes the auto-extended
ECC communication. When more than eight Huawei devices need to use the extended ECC
communication, the manually extended ECC communication must be used instead.
4.9 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions
After you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of each board
on the NE.
4.10 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode
In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flow
diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number of
fiber connections one by one.
4.11 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search
After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail
information does not exist at the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, search for
the cross-connections and fiber connections data over the network to generate end-to-end WDM
trails at the network layer of the U2000.
4.12 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection
Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-
station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.
4.13 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflict
and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. The
ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI1 board in the subrack.
4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflict
and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. The
ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI board in the subrack.
4.15 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflict
and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. The
ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4.1 Creating NEs in Batches


When the U2000/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs that
communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to which
the IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is quicker and
more accurate than manual creation. Therefore, the method of creating NEs in batches is
recommended.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" authority.
l The U2000 must communicate properly with the GNE.
l The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.

For Web LCT, only NEs that use the Ethernet port to communicate can be searched out.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000 or Web LCT

Procedure on the U2000


1. Choose File > Discovery > NE... from the Main Menu. The NE Discovery window is
displayed.
2. Select the Transport NE Search tab.
3. Select the search mode from the drop-down list of Search Mode.
l Sets the Search Mode as Search for NE.
a. In the Search Domain dialog box, click Add and the Input Search Domain dialog
box is displayed.
b. Set Address Type to IP Address Range of GNE, IP Address of GNE, or NSAP
Address, and enter Search Address, User Name, and Password. Then, click
OK.
NOTE
You can repeat the above steps to add more search domains. You can delete the system
default search domain.
l If you use IP address to search for NEs:
l only the NEs (not across routers) in the same network segment can be searched out
in normal conditions if you select the IP Address Range of GNE because
broadcasting is usually disabled for the routers in the network (to prevent network
storm).
l search out the NEs in the network segment by using the IP Address of GNE if you
need to search for the NEs across routers.
l If you search for NEs by using the NSAP address, you can only select NSAP
Address.
c. In the Search for NE dialog box, you can perform the following operations:
– Select Create NE after search, and enter NE user and Password.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE

l The default NE user is root.


l The default password is password.
– Select Upload after being created, so that the NE data can be uploaded to the
U2000 after the NE is created.
NOTE

You can select all options in the Search for NE area to search for NEs, create NEs,
and upload the NE data at a time.
l Sets the Search Mode is IP auto discovery.
NOTE

If you fail to enter a network segment correctly, enable IP auto discovery. After enabling IP
auto discovery, you can obtain the IP address of the GNE and search out all the NEs related to
the GNE.

CAUTION
In the case of NEs that are connected to the NMS through the router, these NEs cannot
be searched out by IP auto discovery. They can be searched out only by network
segment.

4. Click Next and the Result area is displayed.


TIP

You can select the Display uncreated NEs to only display the uncreated NEs.
5. Optional: Click Change NE ID. Then, the Change NE ID dialog box is displayed. Users
can check against the Bar Code List by the value of Bar Code, and then modify the NE
Name, Extend NE ID, Base NE ID, and IP Address fields accordingly.
NOTE

The Bar Code List is provided by the hardware installation personnel to the software commissioning
personnel. The list contains the bar codes of stations.
6. Optional: If you select only Search for NE, after the U2000 completes the search, you
can select the uncreated NEs from the Result list and click Create. The Create dialog box
is displayed. Enter the NE User and Password. Click OK.
7. Optional: Select the NEs from the Result list and click Set Gateway NE. The Set Gateway
NE dialog box is displayed. Enter the message, and click OK.

Procedure on the Web LCT


1. Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. The Search NE dialog box is
displayed.
2. Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.
3. Click Add, and the New Domain dialog box is displayed.
4. Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address, and enter an IP address in the
Domain Address field.
5. Click OK.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE
You can repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains.
6. Close the Manage Domain Search dialog box.
7. Select appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click Search.
NOTE

l The NE search function searches out only the NEs in the specified network segment.
l When the search is in progress, you can click End Search.
8. After the search is complete, select an NE from the list and click Add NE. A prompt
message is displayed, indicating that the NE is successfully added. Click OK.
9. Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or right-
click the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed, enter
lct and password in the User Name and Password fields, and then click OK.
TIP

You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift.


If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box, you can log in to multiple
NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line.
If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box, you do not
need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name and
password for login last time.

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Operation Creating a Single NE If you have obtained the ID of


an NE, you can create the NE
manually.

Switching a Logged-In NE You can switch a login NE


User user without logging out of
the U2000 or Web LCT.

Modifying the NE Name You can change the NE name


as required. This operation
does not affect the running of
the NE.

Deleting NEs If you have created a wrong


NE, you can delete the NE
from the U2000 or Web LCT.

Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:

l The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user.
l The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4.2 Creating Optical NEs


The U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for management. There
are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA and
WDM_OTM.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" authority.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, the license must be installed and the license must support creating
the NE of the type.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Procedure on the U2000


1. Right-click in the Main Topology and choose New > NE.
2. In the Create NE dialog box that is displayed, click corresponding to Optical NE in the
left pane, and then select the type of the optical NE that you want to create.
3. Click Basic Attributes and enter the attributes such as the optical NE name according to
the customer's planning.
4. Click Resource Division and select an NE or a board from the idle optical NEs, and then

click .
TIP

To re-allocate the resources of an optical NE that has been created, right-click the optical NE and
choose Object Attribute. Click the Resource Division tab, select an NE or a board from the list on

the left, and then click to allocate the NE or board to the optical NE.
5. Click OK.
6. Click the Main Topology to create the optical NE icon.

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Operation Modifying the Optical NE See this section to change the
Name name of an optical NE
independently.

4.3 Logging In to an NE
On the U2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Prerequisites
The NE must be created and must be working normally.

The user must have logged in to the U2000.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
On the U2000, a user can see an NE only when the user has the authority to log in to the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the desired ONE icon in the Main Topology to display the NE Panel for the ONE.

Step 2 Right-click the NE and choose Login from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box.

----End

4.4 Uploading the NE Data


By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network
management system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that you configure the NE data by
uploading the data.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
l The NE must be created successfully.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Procedure on the U2000


1. In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management.

2. In the left topology tree, select a created NE and click . In NE Configuration, select
an NE whose NE Status is Unconfigured.
3. Click Upload. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK to start the upload.
4. When the upload is complete, the Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Operation Configuring the NE Data You can configure the NE
data in upload or manual
mode.

4.5 Setting NE ID and IP


ECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word for searching
on the U2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you must assign a
unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision is caused.
In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or expansion process, if you
need to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can change the NE ID on the
U2000.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE and network operator authority or higher.

The ECC GNE or ECC non-gateway NE must be created.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
The master and slave subracks are displayed as one NE on the U2000. They share one NE ID
and one NE IP.

Precautions

CAUTION
l Changing the ID of an NE is a risky operation because it causes the NE to be reset, which
further results in an NE communication failure during the reset.
l Before changing the NE ID, delete the function connected with the NE ID, for example,
the Client 1+1 Protection group, the Intra-Board 1+1 Protection group, the Optical
Wavelength Shared Protection group, the Optical Line Protection group, IPA, ALC, APE,
EAPE, fiber connection and so on. After changing the NE ID, reconnect the fiber connection
and re-configure the protection group, IPA, ALC and other function connected with NE ID
on the U2000.
l Before changing the NE ID, delete the manually added monitoring relationship between
the WMU board and the OTU board on the NE. After changing the NE ID, restore the
deleted monitoring relationship on the U2000.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Procedure
l For Non-Gateway NEs
1. Log in to U2000, delete the NE service configuration and the NE fiber connection.
2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from
the Function Tree.
3. Click the Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID window, enter the New ID and the
New Extended ID. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box.

CAUTION
For non-gateway NEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between this
NE and other NEs on the U2000.

l For Gateway NEs


1. Log in to U2000, delete the NE service configuration and the NE fiber connection.
2. In the NE Explorer, select the GNE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from
the Function Tree.
3. Click Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID window, enter the New ID and the New
Extended ID. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box.

CAUTION
For GNEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between this NE and other
NEs on the U2000. Also, you need to specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs that
are originally connected to the GNE.

l Setting NEs IP
NOTE
If the IP address of an NE is not changed before you change the NE ID, the IP address of the NE varies
with the NE ID. Once the IP address of the NE is changed, the association between the NE ID and IP
address is deleted automatically.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > Communication
Parameters from the Function Tree.
2. Set the communication parameters of the NE, including IP, extended ID, gateway
IP and subnet mask.
3. Click Apply. Click OK in the two displayed Warning dialog boxes. Then click
Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.
NOTE

For GNEs, after you set the NE IP, you need to specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs that
are originally connected to the GNE.

----End

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4.6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT


Server Manually
For NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time is consistent
with the U2000/Web LCT server time, so that the U2000/Web LCT can correctly record the
time that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with the time of
the U2000/Web LCT server.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
On the Web LCT, the synchronous mode of NE time must be set to NM or NULL.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000 or Web LCT

Background Information
Synchronizing the NE time does not affect services. Before synchronizing the NE time, verify
that the system time on the U2000/Web LCT server is correct. If you want to change the system
time, exit the U2000/Web LCT to reset the time, and then restart the U2000/Web LCT.

Procedure on the U2000


1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization
from the Function Tree. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
2. Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. A dialog box is
displayed. Click Yes.
3. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. In this manner, the NE time is
synchronized with the NMS time immediately.

Procedure on the Web LCT


1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization
from the Function Tree.
2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.
3. Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. In this manner, the NE
time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Operation Configuring the NE Time With the time


synchronization function,
consistency is maintained
between the NE time and the
U2000/Web LCT server
time.

4.7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE


By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance
monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of
the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by
maintenance personnel.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.

The NE time must be synchronized with the U2000/Web LCT server time.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000 or Web LCT

Procedure on the U2000


1. Choose Performance > Set NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Main Menu of
the U2000.

2. Select an NE in the left-hand pane, and click .


3. Select the desired NE in the right-hand pane.
4. Select the check box 15-Minute, and click radio button Enabled; or select the check box
24-Hour, and click radio button Enabled.

5. Click the behind From field, select the date, and enter the time to set the beginning
time and end time for monitoring.
NOTE

The start time must be later than the current time of the NMS and NE. If you need to monitor the
performance immediately, set the start time just a little later than the current time of the NMS and
NE. To set the end time, select the check box before To first. The end time must be later than the
start time. If the check box before To is not selected, it indicates that the monitoring function is
enabled all the time.
6. Click Apply. The Warning dialog box is displayed, click OK.
7. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close to finish the operation.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Procedure on the Web LCT


1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor
Time from the Function Tree. In NE Performance Monitor Time, select the desired NE.
NOTE

An NE must be selected at this step. Otherwise, it is impossible for you to proceed with the task.

2. In the Set 15-Minute Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind the
From field to set the start time for monitoring the 15-minute performance of the NE.
TIP

The method of setting the time is as follows: In the hour, minute, or second time control, right-click
the time to increase it, or press Shift and right-click the time to decrease it.

3. In the Set 24-Hour Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind the From
field to set the start time for monitoring the 24-minute performance of the NE.
4. Click Apply to apply the settings.

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Operation Performance Management To ensure the normal


functioning of the network,
the network management and
maintenance personnel
should periodically check
and monitor the network by
taking proper performance
management measures.

4.8 Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication


When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be
used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE takes the auto-extended
ECC communication. When more than eight Huawei devices need to use the extended ECC
communication, the manually extended ECC communication must be used instead.

Prerequisites
The NE must be created on the U2000. The communication between the U2000 and the NE must
be normal.
The communication between NEs must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precaution
The extended ECC communication is disabled by default. To use the automatic extended ECC
communication, you must enable the extended ECC communication on the U2000 as follows:

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

In the NE Explorer, select Communication > ECC Management from the function tree, and
click Apply. And click OK in the Warning dialog box.

Background Information
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet
port on the EFI1 and EFI2 board.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T16 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port
on the EFI board.
l OptiX OSN 6800 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port on the
AUX board.
l OptiX OSN 3800 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port on the
AUX board.

When configuring the manually extended ECC, one server end NE can have a maximum of
seven client end NEs. One client end NE can function as the server end NE of another ECC
group. Normally, the NE without the optical supervisory channel board is configured as the
client end, and the NE with the optical supervisory channel board is configured as the server
end.

The manually extended ECC communication can be set on site or remotely. When setting the
ECC extended mode remotely, with the normal communication between the NE and the
U2000, set the client NE first and then the server NE.

When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, set the NE without the optical supervisory
channel board first and then the NE with the optical supervisory channel board.

In the case of the NE without the optical supervisory channel board, the communication between
the U2000 and the NE stops after the ECC extended mode is set remotely. The communication
between the U2000 and the NE is restored after the setting on the NE with the optical supervisory
channel board at the station is complete.

CAUTION
When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, strictly follow the setting sequence as required.
The ECC extended mode of the remote NEs must be modified first, and that of the gateway NE
must be modified last. Otherwise, the communication between the U2000 and the unreachable
NEs cannot be restored automatically. In this case, the ECC extended mode of the NEs must be
set again on site.

The extended ECC communication is avoided between the subnet gateway NEs.
Hence, when setting the ECC extended mode remotely, work out the ECC setting plan in advance
to ensure that the settings are correct.

For example, a station has nine NEs. The optical supervisory channel board is configured at NE
A. NE A is the server end. NE H is the client end of NE A and the server end of NE I. Figure
4-1 shows the network topology and Table 4-1 provides the IP addresses of the NEs and the
ECC setting plan.

For example, a station has nine NEs.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Figure 4-1 Network topology of a station


B

A C
DCN

I H D

G E

Client NE
F

Server NE

NOTE

NEs of the station are cascaded through network cables.

Table 4-1 Manually extended ECC setting plan

NE IP Address Set Server Set Client

IP Port Opposite IP Port

A 132.37.49.130 0.0.0.0a 1601 - 1601

B 132.37.49.131 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

C 132.37.49.132 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

D 132.37.49.133 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

E 132.37.49.134 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

F 132.37.49.135 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

G 132.37.49.136 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

H 132.37.49.137 0.0.0.0a 1602 132.37.49.130 1601

I 132.37.49.138 - - 132.37.49.137 1602

a: Indicates the local NE.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

When setting the manually extended ECC communication at the station remotely, follow the
sequence below:

NOTE

The default ECC extended mode is automatic mode.

I→H client end→G, F, E, D, C and B→A server end→H server end

During the configuration, the status of the communication between the U2000 and NEs changes
frequently.

l After the setting at NE I is complete, the communication between the U2000 and NE I
stops.
l After the setting at NE H client end is complete, the communication between the U2000
and NE H stops.
l After the settings on NEs B, C, D, E, F, and G client end are complete, the communication
between the U2000 and NEs B, C, D, E, F, and G stops.
l After the setting at NE A server end is complete, the communication between the U2000
and NEs B, C, D, E, F, G, and H restores automatically.
l After the setting at NE H server end is complete, the communication between the U2000
and NE I restores automatically.

Procedure
l Setting the Client NE
1. Log in to the U2000.
2. Double-click the ONE icon, and the Running Status of the ONE is displayed.
3. Select one NE as the server NE. Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer.
4. Choose Communication > Communication Parameter from the left-hand Function
Tree. Observe the NE IP in the right-hand view and record the NE IP.
5. In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click any one remote NE and select NE
Explorer.
6. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the left-hand Function Tree.
7. Set the ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode in the right-hand Functional Panel.
8. Enter the IP of the server NE in the Opposite IP field and the port number in the
Port field in the Set Client dialog box.
NOTE
The port number is the port number of the local NE for communication with the server NE.
9. Click Apply in the Set Client dialog box.
10. An Operation Result dialog is displayed indicating an Operation succeeded
message. Click Close.
NOTE

l The IP addresses of NEs cannot be repeated and must be within the same subnet.
l The client NE can be the server NE of the next lower level. At that time, the client port and the
server port of the local NE cannot be the same. For specific procedure, refer to Setting the Server
NE.
l The port number must be within the range from 1601 to 1699, for example, 1610.
l Setting the Server NE

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

1. Log in to the U2000.


2. Double-click the ONE icon, and the Running Status of the ONE is displayed.
3. Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer.
4. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the left-hand Function Tree.
5. Set the ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode in the right-hand Functional Panel.
6. Enter the port number in the Port field in the Set Server dialog box. The port number
must be the consistent with that value entered in the Port field in the Set Client dialog
box of the client NE.
NOTE

l The port number is the port number of the local NE for communication with the client NE.
l The port number of the server NE must be the same as that of the client NE for
communication.
7. Click Apply in the Set Server dialog box.
8. A dialog box is displayed indicating an This operation will reset the NE
communication. Continue? message. Click OK.

----End

4.9 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions


After you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of each board
on the NE.

Prerequisites
The U2000 server and client must be started up.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Inventory > Physical Inventory from the main menu.
2. Select Board in the Physical Inventory Type. The Board List tab is displayed.
3. Click Filter... in the Board List tab. The Filter window is displayed.

4. Click corresponding to NE Object. The Select NE Object tab is displayed. Then


select the desired NE from the tab, and click OK.
5. The status and version information of each board of the NE are displayed in the user
interface.
6. Click Query. In the displayed Please Select Query Scope dialog box, select Selected
rows or All rows as prompted. Then click OK to query information, such as the software
version of the board. In the displayed Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
7. Obtain the software version of each board in the Software Version column and make
records.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE

The NEs that are loaded with the same software package should have the same software version. Similarly,
the same boards on different NEs that are loaded with the same software package should also have the
same software version. If version inconsistency occurs, immediately provide feedback to the regional
office of Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

4.10 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode


In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flow
diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number of
fiber connections one by one.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
l Optical NEs and NEs must be created.
l Logic board has been created on the U2000.
l Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Planned Wavelength No./
Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the tunable OTU as the designed
wavelength.
l Applies to WDM equipment.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might exist on the NE.
You can synchronize on the U2000 the internal fiber connection data of the NE with the
U2000 side.

Conflicting fibers refer to the different fibers configured on the NE and U2000 sides. Click
Synchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, and then the conflicting fibers are displayed in the
Uncreated Fiber in NMS and Uncreated Fiber in NE user interfaces. The conflicting fibers
cannot be synchronized between the U2000 and the NE. In this case, based on the networking
design, delete the incorrect fibers. After that, click Create Fiber/Cable and re-create the
remaining fibers.

NOTE

The U2000 supports the ability to synchronize WDM fibers in batches. To do so: In the Main Topology
view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > WDM Fiber/Cable Synchronization from the Main Menu.

Procedure on the U2000


Step 1 Optional: Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Fiber/Cable
Synchronization from the Function Tree.
2. Click Synchronize, and the data of the internal fiber connections on the U2000 side and
that on the NE side are displayed. Click Close in the Result dialog box.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE

Synchronized Fiber: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the U2000 and NE sides. U2000 is the
same as the fiber data on NEs.
3. Handle different situations as follows:
l If uncreated fiber in U2000 or uncreated fiber in NE exists, select all the fibers. Click
Create Fiber/Cable, and the dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The synchronized
fibers are displayed in the list of Synchronized Fiber/Cable.
l If conflicting fibers are configured and therefore you fail to create a fiber, click Delete
Fiber/Cable to delete the incorrect fiber and click Create Fiber/Cable to re-create the
failed fiber.
Step 2 To create fiber connections inside an NE, do as follows:
NOTE
The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot edge ports. For how to select an edge port, see
Configuring the Edge Port.

1. Double-click an optical NE on the Main Topology. Click the Signal Flow Diagram tab.
2. In the Signal Flow Diagram, right-click in the blank area and choose Create Fiber from
the shortcut menu. The cursor is displayed as "+".
3. Select the source board and port and click OK. The cursor is displayed as "+".
4. Select the sink board and port and click OK.
TIP

When a wrong source or sink board or port is selected, right-click to cancel the operation and exit
object selection.
5. In the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the attributes of the fiber.
6. Click OK.
TIP

To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.

Step 3 To creating fiber connections between NEs, do as follows:


NOTE
The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot edge ports. For how to select an edge port, see
Configuring the Edge Port.
NOTE
Creating fiber connections between NEs is performed on the Main Topology. In fact, the FIU fiber
connections between stations are created.

1. Click the shortcut icon on the Main Topology and the cursor is displayed as "+" .
2. Click the source NE of the fiber on the Main Topology.
3. Select the source board and source port in the Select Fiber/Cable Source dialog box
displayed.
4. Click OK. The Main Topology is displayed and the cursor is displayed as "+" again.
5. Click the sink NE of the fiber in the Main Topology.
6. Select the sink board and sink port in the Select Fiber/Cable Sink dialog box displayed.
7. Click OK and enter the attributes of the fiber in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box
displayed.
8. Click OK. The created fiber is displayed between the source NE and the sink NE on the
Main Topology.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

TIP

To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.

Step 4 Move the cursor to the fiber that is created and then information about the fiber is displayed.
Read the information to check whether the fiber is created correctly.

----End

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Operation Creating Fiber Compared with the graphic


Connections in List Mode mode, the creating fiber
connections in the list mode
is not visual. Hence, the list
mode is applicable to the
scenario where you create a
few fiber connections only.

Postrequisite
After you create fiber connections, you need to verify all fibers are created to ensure that the
fiber connections are correct and the line communication is available.

4.11 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search


After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail
information does not exist at the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, search for
the cross-connections and fiber connections data over the network to generate end-to-end WDM
trails at the network layer of the U2000.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
l Fiber connections must be correctly created for the WDM equipment.

Precautions
l If certain cross-connections exist, you can create an optical-layer trail by using any of the
following methods:
– Delete the original cross-connection and create the optical-layer trail by using the trail
function. This method affects services.
– Complement cross-connections on NEs and search for the trail.
l You can create only single-NE optical cross-connections from the AM port to the OUT
port of the RMU9 board and from the IN port to the DM port of the WSMD4/WSMD2
board. In this case, the board optical cross-connection is not supported. These types of
single-NE optical cross-connections do not impact services. You need to create these types
of single-NE optical cross-connections and search for trails if you want to manage the
services transmitted in the cross-connections by using the trail management function.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure for the U2000


1. In the Main Topology view, choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail
from the main menu.
2. Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.
NOTE
In the searching by subnet mode, the selected subnet range should be independent from the
networking. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the area beyond
the selected subnet range.
3. Click Next to begin the search for trails. The U2000 takes a while for searching, depending
on the number of services.
NOTE

l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end to
end trails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation.
l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: If the networking changes, the trail may
cause interruption of service flow. For example, the key information for the trail, including
deleting a cross-connection or fiber, is verified.
4. Click Next after searching, you can browse all trails found. If you want to set a trail
management flag, right-click it and select the management flag.
NOTE
Skip this step if you selected the "Automatically create trails after searching policy" in Step 2.
5. Click Next to view all discrete services in the network.
NOTE
If Step 4 is performed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the network
layer. This does not affect services for the actual NE or the data for an individual NE on the
U2000.
6. After the search is complete, click Finish.

4.12 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection


Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-
station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.

The logic fiber connection inside a single station has been set up on the U2000/Web LCT.

The edge port must be configured.

When creating an optical cross-connection of a single station, make sure that the optical cross-
connection of a board in this single station does not occupy the wavelength that the optical cross-
connection of the single station uses.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000 or Web LCT

Background Information
When you create an optical cross-connection, the optical power can be adjusted automatically
or manually. If you select Auto, the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board automatically
adjusts the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the board. If you select Manual, you
need to manually adjust the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the dynamic optical
add/drop multiplexer board. The Auto option is available for the several types of optical cross-
connection trails. For details, see Feature Description.
NOTE

The WSMD9/WSMD4/WSMD2 can be used to replace the WSD9 or the WSM9.


OA indicates the optical amplifier boards such as OAU1 and OBU1.
The FIU can be added before or after the OA.
In drop networking, the demultiplexer boards such as D40, D40V and MR2 can be added between the
WSD9 and OTU.
In add networking, the multiplexer boards such as M40, M40V and MR2 can be added between the OTU
and WSM9.

NOTE

The optical cross-connect services created are unidirectional. The reverse services need to be configured
in addition. The configuration in the other direction is similar.
Optical cross-connections are created by creating optical cross-connections on the board or on a single
station. Creating optical cross-connections on a single station is recommended.

Procedure on the U2000


1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection
Management from the Function Tree. Click NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection tab in
the right-hand pane.
2. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
NOTE

Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of
Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the wavelengths from the Available
Wavelength list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelength. Click OK.
3. Click OK. The created single-station optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.
NOTE

When the operation is performed on the U2000, a dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.

Procedure on the Web LCT


1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection
Management from the Function Tree. Click NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection tab in
the right-hand pane.
2. Click Create. The Create NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

NOTE

1. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of
Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the wavelengths from the Available
Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Click OK.
3. Click OK. The created single-station optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Operation Configuring the Edge Port Setting an edge port is to set
an optical port of an NE as a
connection point between
this NE and another NE.

Creating Board Optical The intra-board optical


Cross-Connection wavelength route can be set
for a board that performs
grooming at the optical layer.
The intra-board service route
is established through the
creation of single-board
optical cross-connection.

4.13 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800


T32/8800 T64
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflict
and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. The
ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI1 board in the subrack.

Prerequisites
The U2000 server and client should be started normally.
The master/slave subracks should be installed.
Fiber connection should be done.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
The master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 of the
EFI2. The EFI1 board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack is 0.
The setting is implemented by DIP switches. The value that can be set by using each of the two
DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW2,
and ID5-ID8 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

The bits from high to low are ID6-ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. Currently,
the first 32 states are used. As shown in Figure 4-2, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is
000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
l Along the direction reaching from a point close to the CPLD, the two DIP switches are
numbered SW1 and SW2.
l When the DIP switch is toggle to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
NOTE

For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the
Product Description.

Figure 4-2 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board

EFI1

CPLD (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) ON (ID2) ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON

SW1 SW2

Figure 4-3 The ID of the subrack: 1-15


SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID

(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON


(ID2) (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) (ID2) ON
1 2 3 4 5
ON ON ON
(ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON
(ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON

(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON


(ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) ON
6 7 8
ON
(ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON 9 (ID3) ON 10
(ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON

(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON


(ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON
(ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
11 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
12 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
13 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
14 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
15

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Figure 4-4 The ID of the subrack: 16-31

SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
16 17 18
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
19 20 21
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
22 23 24
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
25 26 27
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
28 29 30
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON
(ID6) (ID2)
31
ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON

The LED front panel of the SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrack
is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.

On the U2000, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE with
one ID and one IP.

Precautions

CAUTION
Changing the subrack ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt service.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the SCC boards in the master and slave
subracks. If two subrack IDs repeat each other, it indicates a subrack ID conflict. If a subrack
ID displayed on an LED blinks, it indicates a subrack ID mismatch. In either case, adjust the
DIP switches on the EFI1 board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning
so that the DIP switches setting for each subrack is unique.
NOTE
After the adjustment of the DIP switches (change of the subrack ID) is complete, perform a power-off reset
on the NE or the subrack. For details, see step Step 4.

Step 2 Log in to the U2000.

Step 3 Double-click the optical NE to display the Running Status of the ONE.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Step 4 Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer.


1. If there is repetition or blink of the master subrack ID in step 1, perform a power-off reset
on the NE after the DIP switches adjustment.
2. If there is repetition or blink in slave subrack ID in step 1, after jumper adjustment, warm
reset all boards in this slave subrack, or power-off reset the NE.
NOTE

l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be realized by rebooting the subrack power
supply. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all master and slave
subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.
l To prevent service interruption during upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset
operation as follows: First, perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks. Then, change
the ID of the subrack where the subrack ID conflict or mismatch occurs. At last, reboot the power
supply of this subrack.

Step 5 In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE and select Browse Current Alarms to
display the Browse Current Alarms.

Step 6 Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms.
1. If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the
master subrack and the slave subracks are chains.

Step 7 Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms.


1. If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, adjust the DIP switches on the EFI1
board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the DIP
switches setting for each subrack is unique.
2. Reset the board with reference to step Step 4.

Step 8 Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms.
1. Optional: If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, adjust the DIP switches on
the EFI1 board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning to set the
ID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED on the SCC
board in this subrack.
2. Reset the NE or the subrack with reference to Step 4.

Step 9 Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board in the slave subrack and
add the corresponding logical board on the U2000. Check whether the board is available and
operate normally (displayed as green). If yes, the configuration of the master/slave subrack is
correct.

----End

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Operation Configuring Master/Slave Describes how to modify the


Shelf attributes of a master or slave
shelf.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16


The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflict
and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. The
ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI board in the subrack.

Prerequisites
The U2000 server and client should be started normally.
The master/slave subracks should be installed.
Fiber connection should be done.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
The master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 of the
EFI. The EFI board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack is 0. The
setting is implemented by DIP switches. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP
switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW2, and
ID5-ID8 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. The
bits from high to low are ID6-ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. Currently, the
first 32 states are used. As shown in Figure 4-5, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 000001,
which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
l Along the direction reaching from a point close to the T1, the two DIP switches are
numbered SW1 and SW2.
l When the DIP switch is toggle to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
NOTE

For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the
Product Description.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Figure 4-5 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board

U8
SERIAL
T1

SW1 SW2
NM_ETH2

(ID8)
(ID7)
(ID6)
(ID5)

(ID4)
(ID3)
(ID2)
(ID1)
ON
ON
ON
ON

ON
ON
ON
ON
SW1 SW2

Figure 4-6 The ID of the subrack: 1-15


SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID

(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON


(ID2) (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) (ID2) ON
1 2 3 4 5
ON ON ON
(ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON
(ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON

(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON


(ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) ON
6 7 8
ON
(ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON 9 (ID3) ON 10
(ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON (ID4) ON

(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON


(ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON
(ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
11 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
12 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
13 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
14 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
15

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Figure 4-7 The ID of the subrack: 16-31

SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
16 17 18
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
19 20 21
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
22 23 24
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
25 26 27
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON


(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
28 29 30
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON (ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON (ID8) ON (ID4) ON

(ID5) ON (ID1) ON
(ID6) (ID2)
31
ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON

The LCD front panel of the AUX indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrack
is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.

On the U2000, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE with
one ID and one IP.

Precautions

CAUTION
Changing the subrack ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt service.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LCDs on the AUX boards in the master and slave
subracks. If two subrack IDs repeat each other, it indicates a subrack ID conflict. If a subrack
ID displayed on an LCD blinks, it indicates a subrack ID mismatch. In either case, adjust the
DIP switches on the EFI board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning
so that the DIP switches setting for each subrack is unique.
NOTE
After the adjustment of the DIP switches (change of the subrack ID) is complete, perform a power-off reset
on the NE or the subrack. For details, see step Step 4.

Step 2 Log in to the U2000.

Step 3 Double-click the optical NE to display the Running Status of the ONE.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Step 4 Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer.


1. If there is repetition or blink of the master subrack ID in step 1, perform a power-off reset
on the NE after the DIP switches adjustment.
2. If there is repetition or blink in slave subrack ID in step 1, after DIP switch adjustment,
warm reset all boards in this slave subrack, or power-off reset the NE.
NOTE

l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be realized by rebooting the subrack power
supply. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all master and slave
subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.
l To prevent service interruption during upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset
operation as follows: First, perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks. Then, change
the ID of the subrack where the subrack ID conflict or mismatch occurs. At last, reboot the power
supply of this subrack.

Step 5 In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE select Browse Current Alarms to display
the Browse Current Alarms.

Step 6 Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms.
1. If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the
master subrack and the slave subracks are chains.

Step 7 Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms.


1. If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, adjust the DIP switches on the EFI
board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the DIP
switches setting for each subrack is unique.
2. Reset the board with reference to step Step 4.

Step 8 Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms.
1. Optional: If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, adjust the DIP switches on
the EFI board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning to set the
ID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LCD on the AUX
board in this subrack.
2. Reset the NE or the subrack with reference to Step 4.

Step 9 Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board in the slave subrack and
add the corresponding logical board on the U2000. Check whether the board is available and
operate normally (displayed as green). If yes, the configuration of the master/slave subrack is
correct.

----End

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Operation Configuring Master/Slave Describes how to modify the


Shelf attributes of a master or slave
shelf.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

4.15 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800


The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflict
and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. The
ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack.

Prerequisites
The U2000 server and client should be started normally.
The master/slave subracks should be installed.
Fiber connection should be done.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
For OptiX OSN 6800, the master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/
ETH2 of the AUX or the ETH3 of the EFI. The ID of the master subrack is 0 by default. The
AUX board can be used to set the ID of the slave subrack. The setting is realized by jumpers.
l The TN11AUX01 has three jumpers, Figure 4-8 shows the jumpers. The bits from high to
low are 1–3.
l The TN11AUX02 has eight jumpers, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. Figure
4-9 shows the jumpers. The bits from high to low are J16, J15, J4, J3, and J2.
Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. The three jumpers of the TN11AUX01 can be
used to realize eight states that represent decimal values 0–7. The default value of the three
jumpers is 000. The five jumpers of the TN11AUX02 can be used to realize 32 states that
represent decimal values 0–31. The default value of the three jumpers is 00000.
l When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure, it represents the
value 1.
l When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure or the three pins are
not placed with any jumper cap, it represents the value 0.
NOTE

For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the
Product Description.

For OptiX OSN 6800, in Figure 4-10 the value represented by the three jumpers is 0001, which
is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Figure 4-8 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX01


jumpers

1 2 3

CPU

Figure 4-9 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02


Jumpers

J4 J3 J2

J17 J16 J15

J18 J14

CPU

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Figure 4-10 Jumper on the AUX


TN11AUX01

jumper cap

representing 0 representing 0 representing 1

1 2 3

TN11AUX02

jumper cap

representing 0 representing 0 representing 0 representing 0 representing 1

J16 J15 J4 J3 J2

NOTE

The dashed line between two pins in the figure indicates that a jumper cap may or may not be placed over
the two pins.

The LED front panel of the SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrack
is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.
On the U2000, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE with
one ID and one IP.

Precautions

CAUTION
Changing the subrack ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt service.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the SCC boards in the master and slave
subracks. If two subrack IDs repeat each other, it indicates a subrack ID conflict. If a subrack

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

ID displayed on an LED blinks, it indicates a subrack ID mismatch. In either case, adjust the
jumpers on the AUX board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning
so that the jumper setting for each subrack is unique.
NOTE
After the adjustment of the jumpers (change of the subrack ID) is complete, perform a power-off reset on
the NE or the subrack. For details, see step Step 4.

Step 2 Log in to the U2000.

Step 3 Double-click the optical NE to display the Running Status of the ONE.

Step 4 Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer.


1. If there is repetition or blink of the master subrack ID in step 1, perform a power-off reset
on the NE after the jumper adjustment.
2. If there is repetition or blink in slave subrack ID in step 1, after jumper adjustment, warm
reset all boards in this slave subrack, or power-off reset the NE.
NOTE

l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be realized by rebooting the subrack power
supply. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all master and slave
subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.
l To avoid service interruption during upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform the reset
operation in this manner: First, perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks. Then,
change the ID of the subrack where the subrack ID conflict or mismatch occurs. At last, reboot the
power supply of this subrack.

Step 5 In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE to display the Browse Current
Alarms.

Step 6 Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms.
1. If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the
master subrack and the slave subracks are chains.
2. Perform a warm reset on all boards in the master and slave subracks.

Step 7 Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms.


1. If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, adjust the jumpers on the AUX
board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the jumper
setting for each subrack is unique.
2. Reset the board with reference to step Step 4.

Step 8 Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms.
1. Optional: If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, adjust the jumpers on the
AUX board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning to set the ID
of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED on the SCC
board in this subrack.
2. Reset the NE or the subrack with reference to Step 4.

Step 9 Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board in the slave subrack and
add the corresponding logical board on the U2000. Check whether the board is available and
operate normally (displayed as green). If yes, the configuration of the master/slave subrack is
correct.

----End

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network

Reference Information
Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Operation Configuring Master/Slave Describes how to modify the


Shelf attributes of a master or slave
shelf.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to commission optical power on site.

5.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power


This section describes the basic operations, methods, and tools for configuring optical power.
5.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTU board.
5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the tributary board.
5.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the line board.
5.5 Testing Specifications of an SDH Board
If the received optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment. When
this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged. By
testing the specifications of the optical ports, you can check whether the received/transmitted
optical power for each optical port on the equipment is normal.
5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the EDFA optical amplifier
board.
5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier
This section describes the commissioning of and precautions for the deployment of the Raman
amplifier.
5.8 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light
This section describes how to adjust the optical power of dummy light.
5.9 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory Channel
This section describes how to commission the optical power of supervisory channel.
5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board
This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the
multiplexer and demultiplexer board.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board


This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the
ROADM board.
5.12 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM
The single-wavelength input optical power of the DCM must be equal to or lower than –3 dBm.
5.13 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength
System
This section uses Project X as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning
procedures for the OTM, OLA and OADM stations.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

5.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power


This section describes the basic operations, methods, and tools for configuring optical power.

5.1.1 Basic Requirements


This section describes the basic requirements on commissioning optical power.
Basic requirements on commissioning optical power are as follows:
l After commissioning, the optical power should be in the range of the minimum and
maximum values.
l Certain optical power margins should be reserved during commissioning to ensure that the
power fluctuations in a range do not affect services.
l After commissioning, the optical power must meet the requirements for system expansion.
Requirements of commissioning the CWDM network are as follows:
l The CWDM network does not support the OA (Optical Amplifier). Therefore, for a CWDM
network, only the optical power needs to be commissioned. The OSNR and flatness do not
need to be commissioned.
l Only the receive optical power of the OTU needs to be commissioned. Specific
commissioning requirements and procedures are similar to those for the DWDM network.
During capacity expansion, the maximum number of wavelengths that you can add at one time
is half the number of existing wavelengths or less. If there is only one wavelength in the system,
only one wavelength can be added at a time.

5.1.2 General Commissioning Sequence


This section describes the general sequence of commissioning optical power.

General Sequence of Commissioning Optical Power


Optical power for NEs and boards is commissioned individually based on the optical signal flow.
During the commissioning, ensure that the line attenuation is normal based on the requirements
on optical power, gain, and insertion loss for each board.
Generally, the optical power for the OTU board, optical amplifier (OA), and the supervisory
channel board is commissioned based on the corresponding optical power requirements on the
boards.

Optical Power Commissioning Procedures


Usually, the spans between two OTMs in an OptiX WDM system are considered as one network
segment. One network segment has two signal flow directions, the transmit direction and the
receive direction.
For an OptiX WDM system, the optical power for a network segment is commissioned on a per-
NE basis according to the signal flow.
First, commission the transmit optical power for one OTM. Then commission the optical power
for each downstream NE along the transmit direction. Finally, commission the receive optical

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

power for the destination OTM. After commissioning the optical power along the transmit
direction, commission the optical power in the reverse direction of the system.

Project X is used as an example to describe how to commission the optical power of an OptiX
WDM system.

Figure 5-1 shows the networking diagram of Project X. A, B, C, D, E and F are optical NEs
(ONEs). The equipment forms a ring network. ONE A and ONE C are back-to-back OTM
stations, ONE B, ONE D, and ONE F are OLA stations, and ONE E is an OADM station.

Figure 5-1 Networking diagram of Project X


Station A 2OTM Station F OLA Station E OADM

135km/39dB 85km/27dB

55km/15dB 60km/16dB

80km/26dB 100km/30dB

Station B OLA Station C 2OTM Station D OLA

:OTM :OLA : OADM

Project X consists of two network segments: A-B-C and A-F-E-D-C.

First, commission the optical power on the A-B-C network segment according to the following
sequence.
l Commission the optical power along the A-B-C signal flow:
– At ONE A, commission the optical power to ONE B.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power from ONE A.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power to ONE C.
– At ONE C, commission the optical power from ONE B.
l Commission the optical power along the C-B-A signal flow:
– At ONE C, commission the optical power to ONE B.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power from ONE C.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power to ONE A.
– At ONE A, commission the optical power from ONE B.

Based on the previous procedure sequence, commission the optical power for the A-F-E-D-C
network segment in both directions.

NOTE

For details on how to commission the optical power of an NE, see 5.13 Example of Commissioning
Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

5.1.3 Commissioning Tools and Instruments


The optical power meter and the optical spectrum analyzer are required for commissioning
optical power.
l Optical power meter: Used to measure the optical power on the client side and the WDM
side of the OTU, and measure the total optical power of the multiplexed signals.
l Optical spectrum analyzer: Used to measure the optical power, optical signal-to-noise ratio
(OSNR), and the central wavelength of each wavelength in the multiplexed signals.
Calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to measure the optical power. Use
the following method to verify the calibration:
Measure the optical power at the OUT optical port on the OTU by using the optical spectrum
analyzer. Compare it with the optical power obtained by using the optical power meter. If
the difference is less than 0.5 dB, the calibration is acceptable. If the difference is more
than 0.5 dB, recalibrate the optical spectrum analyzer.
NOTE

The optical power of a single wavelength in the multiplexed signals needs to be measured by using an
optical spectrum analyzer. The commissioning result is more accurate when this method is used. When
this method is used, the noise impact does not need to be considered.

5.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board


This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTU board.

CAUTION
The overload of the APD receiver laser is -9 dBm. If the input optical power is higher, the APD
laser may be damaged. Therefore, it is recommended that you insert the fiber loosely from the
input optical port of the OTU during commissioning. After commissioning, make sure the input
optical power is lower than the receiver overload before you insert the fiber.

For the receiver sensitivity, overload, and output optical power specifications for the OTU, see
the Product Description.

5.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light


This section describes how to force the OTU board to emit light.

Prerequisites
The NE must be created on the U2000.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
The signals accessed on the client side or the WDM side should be service signals in actual
transmission, or the optical signals generated by forcing the board to emit light.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

The WDM side of the OTU board by default is forced to emit light. If it does not emit light, refer
to the following procedure to query whether the board is forced to emit light. If the board is not
forced to emit light, set the board to emit light.

NOTE

See the Hardware Description to determine whether Automatic Laser Shutdown can be set for the OTU board.

Precautions
NOTE

l The prerequisite for commissioning the ESC (Electric Supervisory Channel) is that the OTU is forced
to emit light.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer window, select the desired OTU and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Optional: Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Automatic Laser Shutdown of the optical
port on the WDM side of the OTU to DISABLE.
NOTE

Only the LWX2, LWXD and LWXS can set Automatic Laser Shutdown of the WDM side.

Step 4 Set the Laser Status of the optical port on the WDM side of the OTU to OPEN.

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

5.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU Board


This section describes how to adjust the input optical power of OTU board.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical power meter

Precautions

CAUTION
Before the equipment is powered on, verify that the fixed optical attenuator is configured
according to the configuration rules. Verify the input optical power of the OTU (including the
WDM side and client side) is lower than the receiver overload to avoid damage to the optical
module during commissioning. Note that the overload of the APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm.
For the specifications about the sensitivity and overload point of the OTU board, see the Product
Description.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Commissioning Requirements
l For the 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the IN port
on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal
range: from -11 dBm to -4 dBm; adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client
side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from
(sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm.
l For the other OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client side
and the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the
input optical power is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload
point -5) dBm.
NOTE

For certain OTUs, if the overload point of the optical module is 0 dBm, and if the receiver sensitivity
is -17 dBm, the receive optical power should be adjusted within the following range: from -14 dBm
to -5 dBm.
l Confirm the optical preamplifier on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end has output
the standard optical power of single wavelength. When this occurs, the input optical power
on the WDM side can be adjusted based on the actual optical power by adding, changing
or removing the fixed optical attenuators.
l After commissioning, insert a fiber into the input optical port on the OTU when the input
optical power reaches a normal state.

5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board


This section describes how to commission the optical power of the tributary board.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical power meter

Background Information
The tributary boards include the TDX, TOM, TOG, TQS, TDG, TBE, TQM, TSXL, THA,
TOA and TQX.
For the tributary unit specifications, see the Product Description.

Commissioning Requirements
Before the optical signals of a single wavelength are sent to the corresponding tributary board,
adjust the input optical power by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator at the RXn
on the client side of the tributary board. This ensures that the input optical power is within the
optimal range: from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload point - 5) dBm.

5.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board


This section describes how to commission the optical power of the line board.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical power meter

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Background Information
The line board includes the NS2, NS3, NQ2 and ND2.

For the line unit specifications, see the Product Description.

Commissioning Requirements
l For the 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s line units: before the optical signals of single wavelength are
accessed by the corresponding line unit, adjust the input power of the WDM-side optical
port IN of the line unit by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator to be within the
optimal range: from -11 dBm to -4 dBm.
l For the other line units: before the optical signals of single wavelength are accessed by the
corresponding line unit, adjust the input power of the WDM-side optical port IN of the line
unit by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator to be within the optimal range:
from higher than the sensitivity by 3 dBm to lower than the overload point by 5 dBm.
l Generally the commissioning of the output optical power is not needed. However, if the
station is an OADM station or configured with wavelength protection, adjust the VOA of
the output port on the WDM side of the line unit to make the gain flatness for each add
wavelength amplified by the OAU to be less than 2 dB.

5.5 Testing Specifications of an SDH Board


If the received optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment. When
this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged. By
testing the specifications of the optical ports, you can check whether the received/transmitted
optical power for each optical port on the equipment is normal.

The test items are the mean launched optical power and actual received optical power of an
optical interface board.

CAUTION
If the rate of the optical port is variable, add the logical port with the corresponding rate through
the U2000 before testing the specifications of this optical port.

5.5.1 Testing the Mean Launched Optical Power of Optical Interface


Boards
If the mean launched optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment.
When this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged.
This section describes how to test the mean launched optical power of an optical interface board.
This test is performed to ensure that the mean launched optical power of each port is correct.

Prerequisites
The optical port to be tested must be enabled.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

NOTE

The optical port of certain SDH optical interface boards is disabled by default. Before performing the test,
you need to check whether the optical port to be tested is enabled. Determine if it is enabled by doing as
follows: In the NE Explorer window of the U2000 or U2000 LCT, select the board to be tested. Choose
Configuration > SDH Interface, and check the status of the Laser Switch in the list. The status should
be Open.

The optical fiber connections must be tested to ensure the optical fibers are connected correctly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical power meter, fiber jumpers with different connectors, optical fiber connectors, fiber
cleaning tools

Test Connection Diagram


Figure 5-2 shows the connections for testing the mean launched optical power of an optical
interface board.

Figure 5-2 Connection diagram for testing the mean launched optical power of an optical
interface board.

Optical power meter

SDH Board

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Precautions

DANGER
During NE commissioning, avoid directly exposing your eyes to the laser light.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the optical fiber from the OUT port of the optical interface board to be tested. Cap the
removed optical fiber with a protective cap.

Step 2 Use the test jumper to connect the OUT port and the optical power meter.
NOTE
The port of the optical power meter varies. Select a fiber jumper with the corresponding connector.

Step 3 Identify the board feature code and the type of the corresponding optical port by referring to the
section that describes the board bar code in the Hardware Description. Query the specifications
of the corresponding optical port by referring to the Technical Specification Reference. By doing
this, you can obtain the working wavelength for the optical port to be tested.

Step 4 Set the test wavelength of the optical power meter according to the working wavelength of the
optical port.

Step 5 Check the value displayed on the optical power meter. Record the value when it becomes stable.
The recorded value is the mean launched optical power. It should be within the range of the
transmitted optical power for this optical port, specified in the Technical Specification
Reference.

Step 6 If the actual transmitted optical power is outside the range, check and clean the optical fiber
connectors used for the equipment test and the optical power meter. For more information, see
"Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors" in the Supporting Tasks. After cleaning
the connectors, repeat Steps 1-5.

Step 7 After the test is complete, reconnect the optical fiber to the test optical port.

----End

5.5.2 Testing the Actual Received Optical Power of an Optical


Interface Board
If the received optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment. When
this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged. This
section describes how to test the actual received optical power for an interface board. This test
is performed to ensure the actual received optical power for each port is correct.

Prerequisites
l The test of optical fiber connections must be complete. Ensure that the optical fibers are
connected correctly.
l The test result of the mean launched optical power at the optical port must be normal.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

l The fibers for the opposite station must be routed to the ODF of the local station. In addition,
the opposite station must be commissioned and powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical power meter, optical fiber connectors

Test Connection Diagram


Figure 5-3 shows the connections for testing the actual received optical power.

Figure 5-3 Connection diagram for testing the actual received optical power for an optical
interface board

Optical interface
board
Tested
optical
Fiber interface
jumper Fiber IN
- jumper
ODF ODF
OUT

Local station Adjacent station

Procedure
Step 1 At the local station, remove the fiber jumper from the IN port of the optical interface board.
Connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter through the fiber connector.

Step 2 Identify the number of the optical port by referring to the section that describes the board bar
codes in the Hardware Description. Query the specifications of the corresponding optical port
by referring to the Technical Specification Reference. By doing this, you can obtain the working
wavelength for the optical port to be tested.

Step 3 Set the test wavelength for the optical power meter based on the working wavelength of the
optical port.

Step 4 Check the value displayed on the optical power meter. Record the value when it becomes stable.
The recorded value is the value for the actual received optical power.

Step 5 Check whether the value of the actual received optical power is correct by referring to the optical
power range, which is specified in the Technical Specification Reference.
NOTE

The actual received optical power should meet the following requirement:
Minimum sensibility + 3 dB ≤ Actual received optical power (measured value) ≤ Minimum overload
point – 5 dB

Step 6 If the received optical power is not correct, do as follows:

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

l If the received optical power is excessively low, check whether the fiber connector, ODF
fiber adapter, and optical attenuator are normal. For information about cleaning the fiber
connector, see "Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors" in the Supporting
Tasks.
l If the received optical power is excessively high, check whether the optical attenuator is
normal or add an attenuator on the ODF. For information about the values of the optical
attenuators, see the Technical Specification Reference and the description about the actual
received optical power in Step 5.
Step 7 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 until the measured value is normal.
Step 8 When the measured value is normal, reconnect the removed optical fiber to the optical port under
test.
----End

5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical


Amplifier Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the EDFA optical amplifier
board.
The EDFA optical amplifier board includes HBA, OAU1, OBU1, and OBU2.
l Six types of OAU1 are valid: OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103, OAU106 and
OAU105.
l Three types of OBU1 are valid: OBU101, OBU103 and OBU104.
l One type of OBU2 is valid: OBU205.
The relationship between the multiplexed signal and the single wavelength of the optical
amplifier board with regard to the optical power is as follows.
Optical power of multiplexed signal = Optical power of single wavelength + 10lgN (where N
is the number of wavelengths of the multiplexed signal)

Commissioning Requirements
Because the maximum output power of the HBA board is high (26 dBm), the end face of a fiber
at an optical port may be burned. To prevent this from happening, the following two solutions
can be adopted.
l 1. When there is direct fiber fusion splicing on the ODF, complete the following operations:
– (1) Remove the flange on the ODF, and prepare to directly splice fiber 1 to fiber 2 on
the ODF. See Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4 Fiber splicing on the ODF

1
3
OUT F OUT
HBA I ODF
RC U
0
2

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

– (2) Cut off the redundant connectors on the fiber jumpers that are to be spliced. Use a
fiber stripper to remove the external sheath of the fiber jumpers. If you break the 250
um bare fiber core, cut the fiber core at the break and re-strip the fiber.
– (3) Use a fiber cutter to cut the fiber jumpers. Splice the fiber jumpers in the standard
single mode. The splice point must be free of flaws and voids. If the splice point is not
free of flaws and voids, re-splice the fiber jumpers.
– (4) After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tube to sheath the
splice point. Also ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The heat
shrink tubes should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room
and be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tube slot.
l 2. When there is fiber splicing through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF, complete
the following operations:
– (1) Replace the original flange on the ODF with an LSH/APC-LSH/APC (also called
the E2000-E2000) flange. The flange can only be installed on the ODF for the SC.
– (2) Use a Ø3 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper to connect the OUT port of the
FIU board to fiber 3 of the LSH/APC-LSH/APC flange on the ODF. See Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-5 Fiber splicing on the line side

1
3
OUT F OUT
HBA I ODF
RC U
0
2

– (3) Cut off a Ø0.9 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper of 2 m long at an intermediate


point. Connect the cut end of one of the two fiber jumpers to the client-side line fiber
at point 4, as shown in Figure 5-5.
– (4) After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tube to sheath the
splice point. Also ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The heat
shrink tubes should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room
and be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tube slot. The redundant fiber needs to
be spooled on the fiber management tray after the splicing.

5.6.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Optical Amplifier Board


This section describes how to adjust the input optical power of the optical amplifier board.

Commissioning Requirements
Adjust the average single wavelength input optical power of the IN port of the optical amplifier
board to the typical input power for single wavelength ±1 dB. Ensure that the number of
wavelengths whose optical power is higher than the typical value is equal or close to the number
of wavelengths whose optical power is smaller than the typical value.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11HBA is –19 dBm (40-channel) and
–13 dBm (10-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OBU101/TN12OBU101 is –20 dBm
(40-channel) and –23 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OBU103/TN12OBU103 is –19 dBm
(40-channel) and –22 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OBU104/TN12OBU104 is –17 dBm
(40-channel) and –20 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OBU205/TN12OBU205 is –16 dBm
(40-channel) and –19 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/
TN13OAU101 is –16 dBm (40-channel) and –19 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 is –19 dBm
(40-channel) and –22 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU103/TN12OAU103/
TN13OAU103 is –20 dBm (40-channel) and –23 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU105/TN12OAU105/
TN13OAU105 is –16 dBm (40-channel) and –19 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN12OAU100 is –14 dBm (40-channel)
and –17 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN13OAU106 is –12 dBm (40-channel)
and –15 dBm (80-channel).

If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the optical amplifier
board is added with a VOA that is higher than the typical input power of single wavelength,
adjust the VOA before the optical amplifier board to make the average single wavelength input
optical power reach the typical value.
NOTE

For the TN12/TN13 OA board, the input end of the OA is not added with a VOA, but instead uses the inner
EVOA.

If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the optical amplifier
board is added with a VOA that is lower than the typical input power of single wavelength, no
VOA is needed.

5.6.2 Adjusting the Gains for the Optical Amplifier Board


This section describes how to adjust the gains for the optical amplifier board.

Prerequisites
The commissioning of the optical power for the upstream board must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000, optical power meter

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Commissioning Requirements
For the optical amplifier board, set the gain to ensure that the mean output optical power equals
the maximum output optical power for single wavelength. Gain = Maximum output power of
single wavelength - Mean input optical power of single wavelength.
After setting the gain, use the optical spectrum analyzer to check whether the mean output optical
power of single wavelength is in the range of maximum output optical power of single
wavelength - 0.5 dBm to maximum output optical power of single wavelength + 0.5 dBm. If it
exceeds this range, fine tune the gain value.

Procedure
Step 1 Display the NE Explorer on the U2000.
Step 2 Select the desired optical amplifier board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 4 In the Basic Attributes tab, query Nominal Gain Upper Threshold and Nominal Gain Lower
Threshold to get the nominal range for the gain.
Step 5 In the Basic Attributes tab, query Upper Threshold of Actual Gain and Lower Threshold of
Actual Gain to get the settable gain range for the OAU board.
Step 6 Ensure that the input power of the OAU is the average input power of single wavelength.
Calculate the gain value.
Gain = Maximum output power of single wavelength - Average input power of single wavelength
NOTE
The average per-channel input optical power is measured by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 7 Check whether the gain is within the value range calculated in Step 6.
l If the gain is less than the minimum gain calculated in Step 6, increase the attenuation value
of the VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board. This decreases the average input
power of single wavelength to the standard value.
l If the gain is more than the maximum gain calculated in Step 6, decrease the attenuation
value of the VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board. This increases the average
input power of single wavelength. If the gain cannot meet the requirement, confirm the
network design value with the network designer.
Step 8 In the Basic Attributes tab, set the Nominal Gain of the OAU1 board.
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 Click Query. Query the Gain displayed on the U2000. If the gain difference of the actual value
and the set nominal value is within 0.5 dB, the setting is successful. If the setting fails, check
whether the gain is within the gain range.

----End

5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier


This section describes the commissioning of and precautions for the deployment of the Raman
amplifier.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Table 5-1 provides the general commissioning procedures for CRPC and RAU board.

Table 5-1 General commissioning procedures for Raman board


No. Task CRPC RAU board RAU board RAU board
board (Gain (Pump (Maximum
locking) power) power)

1 5.7.4 Y Y Y Y
Checking
the Fiber
Connection
s

2 5.7.5 Y Y Y Y
Connecting
the Fiber
Jumpers on
the Line
Side

3 5.7.6 Y Y Y Y
Checking
the
Configurati
on of the
IPA
Function

4 5.7.7 N Y Y Y
Configuring
the
Working
Mode and
Fiber Type
for the
Raman
Board

5 5.7.8 N Y N N
Adjusting
the Gains
for the
Raman
Board

6 5.7.9 Y N Y N
Adjusting
the On-off
Gain of the
Raman
Board

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

No. Task CRPC RAU board RAU board RAU board


board (Gain (Pump (Maximum
locking) power) power)

7 5.7.10 Y N Y N
Adjusting
the Gain
Spectrum

l "Y" indicates that the commissioning procedure should be performed.


l "N" indicates that the procedure need not be performed.

5.7.1 Preparations
This section describes the requirements on the fiber line, precautions, and tools required for
commissioning the Raman amplifier.
Compared with general amplifiers, the Raman amplifier has a lower noise figure. When general
amplifiers and the Raman amplifier are used in one system, the system can achieve better OSNR.
The strong pump light output from the LINE optical port on a Raman amplifier enters a fiber
line. Therefore, disable the pump laser on the Raman amplifier before the testing.
Before you enter the equipment room, perform the following operations:
l Wear laser-protective glasses (Class 4). Wear long-sleeve ESD coat, shoe covers, and
protective gloves.
l Confirm the number of adopted Raman boards. Be familiar with the fiber connection
between the local Raman boards and remote boards. Be familiar with the connection
between these fibers and the upstream/downstream sites. Be familiar with the location of
the connector. Take the drawings into the equipment room.
l Prepare tools for fiber cleaning: CLETOP cassette cleaner, a video fiberscope (400x or
higher magnification). Clean solvent with wipes. Use only video fiberscopes. For more
information, see Inspecting and Cleaning the Fiber-Optic Connectors.
l U2000 or Web LCT has been installed on the local engineer's PC before the single station
commissioning is performed. This section uses the U2000 as an example to describe the
commissioning procedure.
After the CRPC board works properly, to connect the board to a subrack on another NE, you
must reset the board instead of removing and re-inserting the network cable. The operation of
resetting the CRPC board, however, may interrupt services.

5.7.2 Precautions
The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. Therefore, you should take the
following precautions when using the Raman amplifier.
l Do not insert or remove a fiber when the laser is enabled
When the laser of the Raman amplifier is enabled, do not insert or remove the fiber
connector. Otherwise, the laser may result in fire after the fiber connectors are burned or
there may be personal injuries especially to the eyes.
l Clean the fiber surface.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. If the surface of the fiber jumper
is dirty, the filth of the fiber surface absorbs the energy and heats. As a result, the jumper
is easy to be damaged or burned, and the system performance is affected.
l Perform cable testing.
The gain medium of the Raman amplifier is the transmission cable. Hence, the type and
quality of the transmission cable influences the performance of the Raman amplifier. If the
fiber, especially the end near the Raman amplifier has the poor quality (big loss point or
large reflection factor), the system performance is greatly influenced, and may result in the
line being burned. Hence, testing the cable before enabling the Raman amplifier is
necessary.
l Dedicate the LSH/APC fiber connector.
The reverse output optical power of the Raman amplifier reaches 30 dBm. Hence, the fiber
connector must be the dedicated LSH/APC fiber connector. If the PC fiber connector is
used, a large reflection is formed, which damages the fiber connector.
l Do not bend the fiber.
The bend radius of the fiber jumper of the Raman amplifier should meet the requirements
and cannot be bent. Otherwise, the fiber jumper will burn.
l Enable the laser of the Raman amplifier on the U2000.
For security consideration, if the laser is disabled after the Raman amplifier is working
normally, the Raman amplifier will stop working. You can issue the corresponding
command on the NMS to enable the laser of the Raman amplifier.
l Review the jumper connection before enabling of the laser.
Before enabling the laser of the Raman amplifier, you must connect the jumper at the input
port and the corresponding ODF subrack jumper.
l Meet output optical power requirements.
When the Raman amplifier is used, the pump optical power is high. The requirements of
the near-end fiber increase directly with the optical power. High optical power may bring
damages to equipment and injuries to human body. Hence, the power of the Raman pumping
light should be as low as possible on the premise that the on-off gain is not less than 10 dB.

5.7.3 Requirements on the Fiber Line


The additional loss of a single point on the fiber line should meet the requirements.

NOTE

Whether the single-point loss exceeds the threshold must be determined by performing a bi-directional test.
Use an OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) to test the additional loss at both ends of the fiber
line and calculate the average of the tested two loss values.
Before the deployment of the Raman amplifier, OTDR must be used to determine if the quality of the local
40 km optical cable meets the requirements of deployment.
l 0 km-20 km (0 mi.- 12 mi.): Do not use fiber connectors. The fibers should be connected
to each other by splicing. If the fiber connector is used, components may be burned and the
on-off gain of the Raman amplifier is affected.
l 0 km-10 km (0 mi.-6 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.1 dB (G.652) or
0.2 dB (G.655 LEAF, G.653, TW-RS, TW-C).
l 10 km-20 km (6 mi.- 12 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.2 dB (G.652)
or 0.4 dB (G.655 LEAF, G.653, TW-RS, TW-C).
l 20 km-30 km (12 mi.- 18 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.4 dB.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

l 30 km-40 km (18 mi.- 24 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 1 dB.
l Over 40 kilometers: The single-point additional loss is less than 2 dB.
l The single-point return loss is not less than 40 dB.

5.7.4 Checking the Fiber Connections


This section describes the method of checking the fiber connections of the Raman amplifier.

Prerequisites
The fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct.

Generally, the Raman amplifier is used in the case of extremely low input optical power. When
the SYS port of the Raman amplifier is connected to an optical amplifier board, the variable
optical attenuator (VOA) is not required and it should be replaced with a fiber.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l Optical power meter.
l Optical fiber scope with 400x magnification. A video fiberscope is recommended.
l CLETOP cassette cleaner.
l Clean solvent. Isoamylol is preferred and propyl can be used. Alcohol or formalin cannot
be used.
l Non-woven lens tissue, lint-free wipes, or fiber cleaning tissue. Non-woven lens tissue is
recommended.
l Special compressed gas.
l Special cleaning roll.
l Optical cleaning sticks used for optical connectors or cotton swabs.

Precautions

CAUTION
l Strictly comply with the following procedure to ensure the operation safety.
l The LINE port of the Raman board has extremely high output optical power. Be very careful
during operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the Raman board is in "power-off" state before any operation. Do not completely
insert the Raman board in the designated slot. That is, the board can be placed in the designated
slot but not plugged thoroughly. In this case, the board will not receive power from the subrack.

Step 2 Determine if the SYS port of the Raman board is well connected to the IN port of the FIU or
optical amplifier board with fibers.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 3 Before you connect the line-side fiber to the LINE port of Raman board, ensure that the fiber
loss is normal and that the connection surface of the fiber is clean. Check this with a video
fiberscope (400x or higher magnification).

Step 4 The connection surface should have no dust or scratches. If there is any, immediately replace
the line-side fiber. It is recommended that the customer prepares spare fibers.

----End

5.7.5 Connecting the Fiber Jumpers on the Line Side


This section describes how to connect the fiber jumpers on the line side of the Raman amplifier.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


Fiber cutter, fiber stripper, fusion splicer, heat shrink tubing

Precautions

CAUTION
l The Raman amplifier board must be powered off before the fiber jumpers are spliced, and
the personnel to splice the fiber jumpers must be experienced in fusion splicing.
l Ensure that the endfaces of fiber connectors are clean before you install the fiber connectors.
l The flange must be cleaned using an ultrasonic cleaner.
l To ensure the quality of fiber connectors, it is recommended that you insert and remove an
E2000-E2000 connector for less than 500 times.

Context
The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. In this case, if the endface of a fiber
connector inserted to a port on the Raman amplifier is contaminated, the probability is high that
the fiber endface is damaged. The high output optical power can cause eye damage or skin burns
in case of misoperation. The Raman amplifier has very strict requirements on the loss of the
near-end line fiber. The fiber should have no connector within the distance of 0 km to 20 km
(12 mi.) and fibers should be connected to each other by means of fusion splicing. There are two
fiber splicing modes. (Select the slicing mode according to the actual situations on site.)

Fiber Splicing Probabilit Risks of Difficulty Difficulty Preference


Mode on the y of Personal of On-Site of Level
ODF Endface Injury Operation Maintena
Damage nce

Direct fiber None None Medium Low High


fusion splicing
on the ODF

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Fiber Splicing Probabilit Risks of Difficulty Difficulty Preference


Mode on the y of Personal of On-Site of Level
ODF Endface Injury Operation Maintena
Damage nce

Fiber splicing Low Very low Medium Medium Medium


through the
E2000-E2000
connector on the
ODF

Procedure
Step 1 In the case of direct fiber fusion splicing on the ODF, the procedure is as follows:
1. Remove the flange on the ODF, and ready to directly splice fiber 1 to fiber 2 on the ODF.
The CRPC board shown is used as an example.

ODF CRPC
Line Sys

2. Cut off the redundant connectors on the fiber jumpers to be spliced, and use a fiber stripper
to remove the external sheath of the fiber jumpers. If you break a 250 um bare fiber core,
cut the fiber core at the break and re-strip the fiber.
3. Add a heat shrink tubing to one of the fiber jumper to protect the melting point after fiber
splicing.
4. Use a fiber cutter to cut the fiber jumpers. Then, splice the fiber jumpers in the standard
single mode. The splice point must be free of flaws or voids. Otherwise, re-splice the fiber
jumpers.
5. After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tubing to sheath the splice
point. In addition, ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 50 mm. The heat
shrink tubing should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room and
be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tubing slot.
Step 2 In the case of fiber splicing through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF, the procedure is
as follows:
1. Replace the original flange on the ODF with an LSH/APC-LSH/APC (also called E2000-
E2000) flange.
2. Use a Ø3 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper to connect the LINE port of the CRPC
board to fiber 3 of the LSH/APC-LSH/APC flange on the ODF. The CRPC board shown
is used as an example.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

ODF CRPC
Line Sys

3. Cut off a Ø0.9 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper of 2 m long at an intermediate point.


Add a heat shrink tubing to one of the fiber jumper that is cut off or the customer line cable
to protect the melting point after fiber splicing. Then splice the cutoff end of the fiber with
the customer line cable at point specified by 4 in the figure above.
4. After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tubing to sheath the splice
point. In addition, ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 50 mm. The heat
shrink tubing should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room and
be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tubing slot. The redundant fiber after the splicing
needs to be spooled on the fiber management tray.

Step 3 Insert the Raman board thoroughly into the designated slot. If this is a new cabinet that is
installed, proceed in powering on the cabinet and the corresponding subrack. If the cabinet and
the subrack are already in service and therefore powered on, see 5.7.6 Checking the
Configuration of the IPA Function.

----End

5.7.6 Checking the Configuration of the IPA Function


This section describes the procedure for checking the configuration of the IPA function when
you commission the Raman amplifier.

Prerequisites
The fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct.

When set Working Mode of the RAU boards to Gain locking or Maximum gain, you must
set Fiber Type as the actual fiber type.

Precautions

CAUTION
The optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. It is recommended to configure the IPA
function should be previously. When a Raman amplifier is configured, set the threshold for the
detection board when configuring the IPA function. Before the commissioning at each station,
disable the IPA function and the laser of the Raman board. For more information regarding
configuring the IPA function, see Intelligent Power Adjustment (IPA) of Raman System.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the
Function Tree. For more information regarding IPA configuration, refer to Intelligent Power
Adjustment (IPA) of Raman System.
Step 2 Ensure that the IPA Status attribute of the IPA Group is Disabled. If not, set them to
Disabled and click Apply.

----End

5.7.7 Configuring the Working Mode and Fiber Type for the Raman
Board
This section describes how to configure Working Mode and Fiber Type for the RAU1 board.

Prerequisites
The RAU1 board must be working properly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Set Working Mode for the RAU1 board as required.
1. Navigate to the NE Explorer. In the Function Tree, select the desired RAU1 board and
choose Configuration > WDM Interface.
2. Click Advanced Attributes. Set Working Mode to Gain locking, Maximum power, or
Pump power as required for the LINE port.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE

For the OUT port of the RAU1 board, Working Mode can be set to Gain locking or Pump power.

Step 2 Set the fiber type to the type of physical fibers that have been used.
1. In the Advanced Attributes tab. set Fiber Type to the type of physical fibers that have
been used.
2. Click Apply.

----End

5.7.8 Adjusting the Gains for the Raman Board


This section describes how to adjust the gains for the RAU1 board.

Prerequisites
The fiber connections on the RAU1 board must be correct.
The commissioning must be performed after all the current services are added.
Return loss detection is enabled.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

The Raman module of the RAU1 board must work under Gain locking.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical power meter, U2000

Precautions
NOTE

Return loss detection is enabled by default. If the RL_CRITICAL_LOW or RL_CRITICAL_HI alarm is reported
during commissioning, remove the alarm by referring to RL_CRITICAL_LOW or RL_CRITICAL_HI in
Alarms and Performance Events Reference.

Context
If the TN11RAU1 board is used in the system, set the gain of the Raman module and EDFA
module for the different types of the fibers by referring to Table 5-2 and Table 5-3.

Table 5-2 Setting the TN11RAU1 board gain in a system using G.652 fibers
Loss(dB) Gain(dB)-Raman Gain(dB)-EDFA Remarks

19 5 14 When the line loss is


in the range of 19 dB
20 6 to 24 dB (smaller
21 7 than 24 dB), keep the
EDFA gain at 14 dB
22 8 and set the Raman
amplifier gain to
23 9 ensure that the line
loss meets the
requirement.

L 10 L - 10 When the line loss is


in the range of 24 dB
to 33 dB, keep the
Raman amplifier
gain at 10 dB and set
the EDFA gain to
ensure that the line
loss meets the
requirement.

Table 5-3 Setting the TN11RAU1 board gain in a system using G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C
fibers
Loss(dB) Gain(dB)-Raman Gain(dB)-EDFA Remarks

19 5 14 When the line loss is


in the range of 19 dB
20 6 to 26 dB (smaller
than 26 dB), keep the

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Loss(dB) Gain(dB)-Raman Gain(dB)-EDFA Remarks

21 7 EDFA gain at 14 dB
and set the Raman
22 8 amplifier gain to
23 9 ensure that the line
loss meets the
24 10 requirement.

25 11

L 12 L - 12 When the line loss is


in the range of 26 dB
to 35 dB, keep the
Raman amplifier
gain at 12 dB and set
the EDFA gain to
ensure that the line
loss meets the
requirement.

Procedure
Step 1 Use an optical power meter to measure the actual input optical power on the LINE port of the
Raman board and check whether it is greater than 1 dBm. If it is greater than 1 dBm, add a fixed
attenuator to the transmit end of the upstream site so that the input optical power on the LINE
port meets the requirement. Note that the input optical power on the LINE port of the RAU1
board must be within the range of -40 dBm to +1 dBm. If it is greater than +1 dBm, the Raman
amplifier may be damaged.

Step 2 Set the gain of the RAU1 board by referring to Table 5-2, Table 5-3.
1. Click Basic Attributes. Set Nominal Gain (dB) for the LINE and OUT ports according
to the actual line loss.
2. Click Apply.
NOTE

You do not need to set Nominal Gain (dB) if the Raman module of the RAU1 board is working in Maximum
power mode.

----End

5.7.9 Adjusting the On-off Gain of the Raman Board


This section describes how to adjust the on-off gain of the Raman board.

Prerequisites
The fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct.

The commissioning must be performed after all the current services are added.

The Raman module of the RAU1 board must work under Pump power.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Spectrum analyzer, U2000.

Precautions
NOTE

Return loss detection is enabled by default. If the RL_CRITICAL_LOW or RL_CRITICAL_HI alarm is reported
during commissioning, remove the alarm by referring to RL_CRITICAL_LOW or RL_CRITICAL_HI in
Alarms and Performance Events Reference.
NOTE

The gain medium of the reverse Raman amplifier is transmission fiber, so the gain value depends on the
type, length, and attenuation of the transmission fiber. If the gain values are required to be the same, different
fibers should correspond to different optical power of pumps. Set the initial optical power of the Raman
amplifier during network commissioning to the optical power values and the requirement of the on-off gain
of each channel in the following table.

Table 5-4 Recommended optical power values of Raman pump for different fibers
Board Type Fiber Type P1 P2 On-Off gain
(Optical Power (Optical Power
of Pump of Pump Group
Group 1) 2)

CRPC G.652 +24.0 dBm +24.0 dBm 11 dB

G.655 LEAF +24.5 dBm +24.5 dBm 13 dB

G.653/TW- +23.5 dBm +23.5 dBm 13 dB


RS/TW-C

RAU1 G.652 +24.5 dBm +24.5 dBm 12 dB

G.655 LEAF +25.0 dBm +25.0 dBm 14 dB

G.653/TW- +24.0 dBm +24.0 dBm 14 dB


RS/TW-C

Context
The on-off gain refers to the difference between the output optical power on the SYS port of the
Raman board when the pump laser is turned on and the output optical power when the pump
laser is turned off. During the calculation of the on-off gain, optical noise must be measured
using an optical spectrum analyzer and be considered because it may have impact on gain
calculation.

Procedure
Step 1 Close the pump laser of the Raman board.
1. Select the desired CRPC/RAU board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
2. Select By Board/Port (Channel).

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

3. Click the Basic Attributes tab, and ensure that the Laser Status of the LINE ports of the
Raman board WDM interfaces are Close. If not, set them to Close and click Apply.

Step 2 Disconnect the fiber between the SYS port of the RAMAN board and the IN port of the FIU or
optical amplifier board.

Step 3 Connect the fiber from the SYS port to the test port of the spectrum analyzer. Scan the spectrum.
Obtain the actual signal optical power and record it.

Step 4 Select the desired CRPC/RAU from the left-hand Navigator Tree, and choose Configuration >
WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 5 Select By Board/Port(Channel) and click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Step 6 Set the optical power of the pump laser to the recommended value.

Step 7 Open the pump laser on Raman amplifiers manually. In the Basic Attributes tab, set the Laser
Status of the LINE port of the Raman board WDM interfaces are On, and click Apply.

Step 8 Calculate the on-off gain of the SYS port by using the following formula:

SYS on-off gain = SYS signal output power (Raman laser enabled) - SYS signal output power
(Raman laser disabled)

NOTE

Before reconnecting the SYS port of the Raman board to the IN port of the FIU board, you must disable
the laser of the Raman and IPA.

Step 9 Adjust the on-off gain.


NOTE
For the different fiber type, the on-off gain of each channel must be greater than the requirement value, which
is required by the Raman board. If not, adjust the on-off gain to make it meet the requirements.

1. Select the desired CRPC/RAU in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Click Advanced Attributes. Increase the Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm) of the
CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-1 port and the CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-2 port of Optical Interface/
Channel. Increase the optical power of both groups of pumps by 0.1 dBm respectively at
a time until the minimum on-off gain of each channel is higher than the requirement value.
NOTE

For the RAU board, set the Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm) of the 9(LINE)-1 and 9(LINE)-2 port in
the Advanced Attributes tab.

NOTE
If the pump optical power is set too high, the PUM-LBC-HIGH alarm is generated. If this alarm occurs, the
pump optical power set is excessive and must be decreased. If this alarm occurs while the gain does not reach
the requirements, shut down the pump lasers and check the line fiber. Replace or repair the line fibers if necessary.

----End

5.7.10 Adjusting the Gain Spectrum


This section describes the procedure for adjusting the gain spectrum of the Raman amplifier.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Prerequisites
The fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct.

The commissioning must be performed after all the current services are added.

The Raman module of the RAU1 board must work under Pump power.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Spectrum analyzer, U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Adjust the pump power to ensure that the gain spectrum meets the requirement.
l After adjusting the on-off gain to the requirement value, determine if the gain flatness among
all the wavelengths is within 3 dB. If yes, the gain flatness requires no adjustment.
NOTE

The requirement of the on-off gain of each channel of the Raman amplifier refer to Table 5-4.
l If the gain flatness among all the wavelengths exceeds 3 dB, proceed to the next step to adjust
the pump optical power according to the Raman gain spectrum to improve the gain flatness.

Step 2 Find the wavelengths of the highest and lowest gains.

Step 3 If the short-wavelength gain is lower than the long-wavelength gain, increase the optical power
of pump laser group 1 to elevate the shortwave gain or decrease the optical power of pump laser
group 2 to lower the long-wave gain. Adjust the pump optical power in steps of 0.1 dBm until
the optical power difference meets the requirement. That is, the gain flatness among all the
wavelengths is within 3 dB.

Step 4 If the short-wavelength gain is higher than the long-wavelength gain, decrease the optical power
of pump laser group 1 to lower the shortwave gain or increase the optical power of pump laser
group 2 to elevate the long-wave gain. Adjust the pump optical power in steps of 0.1 dBm until
the optical power difference meets the requirement. That is, the gain flatness of each wavelength
is within 3 dB.

Step 5 Retest the on-off gains to determine if the on-off gain of each wavelength is higher than the
requirement value. If not, increase the optical power of both pump laser groups 1 and 2 in steps
of 0.1 dBm until the on-off gain of each wavelength is greater than the requirement value.
NOTE

After item 3 of step 6, the pump optical power is changed. As a result, the on-off gains need be retested.
If the on-off gain of any wavelength is smaller than the requirement value, the optical power of both pump
laser groups 1 and 2 need be increased to meet the gain requirement according to the new optical power
rate between the two pump laser groups. The gain difference between the two pump laser groups cannot
change.

----End

5.8 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light


This section describes how to adjust the optical power of dummy light.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Prerequisites
You must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Background Information
For a system that cannot be fully configured with service wavelengths in the initial phase, vacant
channels must be filled with wavelengths that do not carry services, or the optical power must
be increased for one or more wavelengths that do not carry services to ensure that the input
optical power of optical amplifiers (OAs) satisfies the system requirement. The wavelengths
that do not carry any services are called dummy light wavelengths.

The networking for producing dummy light depends on the channel spacing of the system.

l 100 GHz channel spacing


The networking for producing dummy light is OA+ITL+OA+OD, as shown in Figure
5-6.
NOTE

In a system with 100 GHz channel spacing, only even wavelengths are generally deployed. Therefore, in
the following figure, only even wavelengths in the dummy light block are transmitted from the TE port
on the ITL board to the OA board and the odd wavelengths transmitted from the TO port on the ITL board
are not used.

Figure 5-6 Networking for producing dummy light (100 GHz channel spacing)

EVEN
VO
IN
IN VI IN
OA(OBU101) ITL OA(OAU101) D40
OUT TE OUT

RDC
TDC M40V

Dummy Light

OTU

OTU

l 50 GHz channel spacing


The networking for producing dummy light is OA+ITL+2xOA+2xOD, as shown in Figure
5-7.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Figure 5-7 Networking for producing dummy light (50 GHz channel spacing)
OTU

ODD
OTU
VO
IN
IN IN M40V
OA(OAU101) D40
TO OUT
RDC
IN
OA(OBU101) TDC
ITL
OUT VO
IN
IN IN
OA(OAU101) D40
TE OUT
M40V
RDC
TDC
OTU
EVEN
Dummy Light OTU

Requirements for Commissioning Forward Raman Amplifier Boards


Commissioning of a forward Raman amplifier is to adjust the pump power of the amplifier and
the signal power allocation for each channel of the amplifier. The adjustment is determined by
the system design for the spans. To commission a forward Raman amplifier board, an optical
spectrum analyzer (OSA) or an optical spectrum analyzing board must be used at the receive
end to determine in real time whether the OSNR flatness and optical power flatness are as
expected. It is recommended that the OSNR flatness be smaller than 1 dB and the optical power
flatness meet the system requirement.

Procedure
Step 1 Before adjusting the optical power of wavelengths that carry dummy light, ensure that the
wavelengths that carry service signals provide the optimal performance. For details, see 6
Remotely Commissioning Optical Power.

Step 2 Set the EVOA attenuation for the M40V board's port connecting to the D40 board to the
maximum value.

Step 3 Set Working Mode to Power Locking for the first-level OA (OBU101) board. And set Power
Value to 0 dBm.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the OBU101 board. In the navigation tree, choose
Configuration > WDM Interface.
2. On the Advanced Attributes tab, set Working Mode to Power Locking.
3. Set Power Value to 0 dBm.
4. Click Apply.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 4 Enable the first-level OA (OBU101) board to forcibly emit light.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the OBU101 board. In the navigation tree, choose
Configuration > WDM Interface.
2. Click Query.
3. Enable Laser Status for the OUT port on the OBU101 board is On .

Step 5 Adjust the EVOA attenuation for the second-level OA (OAU101) board to ensure that the total
input optical power of the board reaches the standard optical power.
1. Right-click the NE housing the OAU101 board and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu to start the NE Explorer.
2. Select the OAU101 board and in the navigation tree choose Configuration > WDM
Interface.
3. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for the VI port on the OAU101 board to ensure
that the total input optical power of the board reaches the standard optical power.
NOTE

In the navigation tree, choose Configuration > Optical Power Management. On the right side of the
window, check the value of Input Power, which represents the optical power of the IN port on the OBU103
board.
4. Click Apply.

Step 6 Set the EVOA attenuation to 5 dB for the wavelength that carries dummy light next to the
wavelength that carries service signals on the M40V board.

Step 7 Fine-tune the EVOA attenuation for the wavelength that carries dummy light and other
wavelengths that carry service signals on the M40V board to ensure that the board provides the
optimal optical power balancing among the wavelengths.

Step 8 Repeat Step 6 through Step 7 to adjust the optical power of the remaining wavelengths that carry
dummy light one by one to ensure that the system will be able to provide the optimal performance
when a maximum of wavelengths are provisioned.

----End

5.9 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory Channel


This section describes how to commission the optical power of supervisory channel.

The system offers two types of supervisory channels:


l Optical supervisory channel (OSC)
l Electrical supervisory channel (ESC)

The OSC requires the optical supervisory channel unit HSC1, SC1 or SC2. The unit is used to
transmit and receive the supervisory information.

The ESC does not need the optical supervisory channel units. In this mode, the optical
transponder unit (OTU) multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channels for
transmission.

NOTE

After the boards are commissioned and work normally, the ESC and OSC are enabled by default.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

5.9.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of the OSC Board


This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OSC board.

Prerequisites
The commissioning of the optical power at the transmit end of the upstream station must be
complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical power meter, fixed attenuator

Commissioning Requirements
The receive optical power of OSC is in the range of -48 dBm to -3 dBm. The transmit optical
power of OSC is in the range of -4 dBm to 0 dBm. Basic requirements of the optical power
commissioning on the OSC are as follows:

l The receive optical power of the OSC should be in the range of -45 dBm to -8 dBm.
NOTE

The receive optical power of the ST2 board and the OSC unit on the DAS1 board is in the range of -41 dBm to
-10 dBm.

To prevent the laser on the OSC board at the receive end from being burnt, fixed attenuators that
are required must be configured properly by referring to the following tables.
l When the SC1 or SC2 board is used as the OSC board,

Table 5-5 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the SC1 or SC2 board

System Rate Line Fiber Standard Fix Attenuator on the SC1/


Type Optical SC2 Board (Line Insertion
Power Loss Is the EOL Value)
Incident
Scenario or 0 <= Insertion
Not Insertion Loss >= 20
Loss < 20

10 Gbit/s SSMF/LEAF/ Yes (and an 15 dBa N/A


TWRS/TWC/ EVOA is
TW+ configured
before an
optical
amplifier)

No (and an
EVOA is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier)

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

System Rate Line Fiber Standard Fix Attenuator on the SC1/


Type Optical SC2 Board (Line Insertion
Power Loss Is the EOL Value)
Incident
Scenario or 0 <= Insertion
Not Insertion Loss >= 20
Loss < 20

G.653/SMF- - - -
LS
No (and no 15 dBa N/A
EVOA is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier)

40 Gbit/s, or a SSMF/LEAF/ Yes (and an 15 dBa N/A


mixture of 10 TWRS/TWC EVOA is
Gbit/s and 40 configured
Gbit/s before an
optical
amplifier)

LEAF/TWRS/ No (and no
TWC/TW+/ EVOA is
SMF-LS/G. configured
653 before an
optical
amplifier)

a. Configure the fixed attenuator at the TM port on the SC1 board or the TM1/TM2 port
on the SC2 board.

l When the ST2 board is used as the OSC board,

Table 5-6 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the ST2 board
System Line Fiber Standard Fix Attenuator on the ST2 Board (Line
Rate Type Optical Insertion Loss Is the EOL Value)
Power
Incident 0 <= 15 <= Insertion
Scenario Insertion Insertion Loss >= 25
or Not Loss < 15 Loss < 25

10 Gbit/s SSMF/ Yes (and an 15 dBa N/A N/A


LEAF/ EVOA is
TWRS/ configured
TWC/TW+ before an
optical
amplifier)

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

System Line Fiber Standard Fix Attenuator on the ST2 Board (Line
Rate Type Optical Insertion Loss Is the EOL Value)
Power
Incident 0 <= 15 <= Insertion
Scenario Insertion Insertion Loss >= 25
or Not Loss < 15 Loss < 25

No (and an
EVOA is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier)

G.653/ - - - -
SMF-LS
No (and no 20 dBb 10 dBa N/A
EVOA is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier)

40 Gbit/s, or SSMF/ Yes (and an 15 dBa N/A N/A


a mixture of LEAF/ EVOA is
10 Gbit/s TWRS/ configured
and 40 Gbit/ TWC before an
s optical
amplifier)

LEAF/ No (and no 20 dBb 10 dBa N/A


TWRS/ EVOA is
TWC/TW+/ configured
SMF-LS/G. before an
653 optical
amplifier)

a. Configure the fixed attenuator at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board.
b. Configure a 10 dB fixed attenuator at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board and a 10
dB fixed attenuator at the RM port on the FIU board.

Table 5-7 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the ST2 board for Raman System
Line Insertion Loss(EOL Value) Fix Attenuator on the ST2 Board

0<=IL<24 NA

24<=IL<30 7a

30<=IL NA

a: If a more than 7 dB fixed attenuator has been configured for the ST2 board refer to
Table 5-6, it does not need to configure other fixed attenuators.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

l When the DAS1 board is used,

Table 5-8 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the OSC unit of the DAS1 board
System Line Fiber Standard Fix Attenuator on the OSC Unit of the
Rate Type Optical DAS1 Board (Line Insertion Loss Is
Power the EOL Value)
Incident
Scenario 0 <= 15 <= Insertion
or Not Insertion Insertion Loss >= 25
Loss < 15 Loss < 25

10 Gbit/s SSMF/ Yes (and an 15 dBa N/A N/A


LEAF/ EVOA is
TWRS/ configured
TWC/TW+ before an
optical
amplifier)

No (and an
EVOA is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier)

G.653/ - - - -
SMF-LS
No (and no 20 dBb 10 dBa N/A
EVOA is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier)

40 Gbit/s, or SSMF/ Yes (and an 15 dBa N/A N/A


a mixture of LEAF/ EVOA is
10 Gbit/s TWRS/ configured
and 40 Gbit/ TWC before an
s optical
amplifier)

LEAF/ No (and no 20 dBb 10 dBa N/A


TWRS/ EVOA is
TWC/TW+/ configured
SMF-LS/G. before an
653 optical
amplifier)

a. Configure the fixed attenuator at the TX port on the DAS1 board.


b. Configure a 10 dB fixed attenuator at the TX port on the DAS1 board and a 10 dB
fixed attenuator at the RM port.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Table 5-9 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the OSC unit of the DAS1 board
for Raman System

Line Insertion Loss(EOL Value) Fix Attenuator on the OSC Unit of the
DAS1 Board

0<=IL<24 NA

24<=IL<30 7a

30<=IL NA

a: If a more than 7 dB fixed attenuator has been configured for the DAS1 board refer to
Table 5-8, it does not need to configure other fixed attenuators.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of the OSC unit.
l The RM port of the OSC board connects to the TM port of the FIU board at the local station.
l The TM port of the OSC board connects to the RM port of the FIU board at the local station.
l The RX port on the DAS1 board is the receive optical port of the OSC unit and must be
connected to the TM port. The TX port is the transmit optical port of the OSC unit and must
be connected to the RM port.

Step 2 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the transmit optical
power of the OSC board. It should be in the range from -4 dBm to 0 dBm. If it does not meet
the requirement, replace the board.
NOTE

The supervisory channel on the ST2 board supports the following wavelengths: 1491 nm and 1511 nm.

Step 3 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the actual receive
optical power of the OSC board. It should be in the range from -48 dBm to -3 dBm. The input
optical power of the OSC board can be adjusted on the basis of the actual optical power by
adding, changing or removing the fixed optical attenuators.
NOTE

The supervisory channel on the ST2 board supports the following wavelengths: 1491 nm and 1511 nm.
NOTE

If the result does not meet the requirements, clean the fiber connector. If the problem persists, check whether
the OSC is faulty, and if so, clear the fault.

Step 4 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then test the insertion loss between
the IN and TM ports, and between the RM and OUT ports of the FIU. The values should be less
than 1.5 dBm.

----End

5.9.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of ESC Board


This section describes the basic requirements on commissioning the optical power of the ESC
board.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Commissioning Requirements
When the OTU starts to work and the service is normal (or the WDM side of the OTU side
transmits light), the ESC route is set up.

By default the WDM side of the OTU board emits light forcibly. If it does not emit light, see
5.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light to query whether the board is forced to emit light.
If the board is not forced to emit light, configure the board so that it emits light forcibly.

5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and


Demultiplexer Board
This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the
multiplexer and demultiplexer board.

5.10.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V and D40V Boards


This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the M40V
and D40V boards.

Tools, Equipment, and materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, U2000

Commissioning Requirements
Adjust the optical power and the flatness of OSNR by adjusting the built-in VOA for each
wavelength at the receive end to meet the requirements.
l Adjust the attenuation of the VOA on each channel of the M40V or D40V at the transmit
end to 5 dB before commissioning.
1. In the NE Explorer and select the desired M40V board, choose Configuration >
WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to 5dB.
3. Click Apply. A prompt appears telling you that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
l Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow.
Then measure the optical power and the OSNR for each channel in the WDM mode. Or
connect the INx port of the MCA4/MCA8 board to the MON port on the last OAU in the
signal flow. Then measure the optical power and the OSNR for each channel on the
U2000 as follows:
– Select the desired MCA4/MCA8 board in the NE Explorer, choose Configuration >
Laser Spectrum Analysis from the left-hand Function Tree.
– Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query.
– In Spectrum Data, query Optical Power (dBm) and OSNR(dB) for each current
wavelength.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

NOTE

l The MON port of the OAU1, OBU1, OBU2 and CRPC board is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal
at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal power).
l The MON port of the HBA board is a 1/999 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30dB
lower than the actual signal power).
l According to the optical spectrum figure, determine the channels with the largest or the
smallest optical power (or OSNR). Adjust the VOA for the corresponding channels of the
M40V/D40V to make the optical power (or OSNR) near the average value.
l Ensure that the maximum difference of optical power among all the channels is within 4
dB, and the maximum different of the OSNR among all the channels is within 2 dB.

NOTE

Generally the output optical power values of all OAUs do not have obvious changes after this
commissioning. If changes are obvious, adjust the VOA before the first OAU of the signal flow to make
the input optical power reach the standard value. There is no need to adjust the successive OAUs. Ensure
that the OSNR is flat and that the optical power is near the standard value.

5.10.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU/SFIU Board


This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the insertion loss of the FIU
board.

Tools, Equipment, and materials


Optical power meter, Optical spectrum analyzer

Commissioning Requirements

CAUTION
If fiber connectors or fiber adapters are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously
affected. Therefore, the two end faces and the fiber adapter for every external fiber that is
connected into the equipment through the ODF must be cleaned. Perform the cleaning before
inserting an external fiber to an optical port on the equipment.

Note the insertion loss for the FIU boards:


l IN–>TC insertion loss = Input optical power of IN port – Output optical power of TC port
l RC–>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RC port – Output optical power of OUT
port
l IN–>TM insertion loss = Input optical power of IN port – Output optical power of TM port
l RM–>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RM port – Output optical power of OUT
port
Note the insertion loss for the SFIU boards:
l LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss = Input optical power of SYS1 port – Output optical power
of LINE1 port
l LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss = Input optical power of SYS2 port – Output optical power
of LINE2 port

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

l LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss = Input optical power of OSC1 port – Output optical power
of LINE1 port
l LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss = Input optical power of OSC2 port – Output optical power
of LINE2 port

The optical power can be measured with an optical power meter or an optical spectrum analyzer.
The basic requirements for the measurements are as follows.

Method one: measurement with an optical power meter of the FIU/SFIU


l For IN–>TC insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.
l For RC–>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT port when
disconnecting the fiber of the RM port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0
dB.
l For IN–>TM insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
l For RM–>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT port when
disconnecting the fiber of the RC port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5
dB.
l For LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE1 port when
disconnecting the fiber of the OSC1 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.0 dB.
l For LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE2 port when
disconnecting the fiber of the OSC2 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.0 dB.
l For LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE1 port when
disconnecting the fiber of the SYS1 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.5 dB.
l For LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE2 port when
disconnecting the fiber of the SYS2 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.5 dB.

Method two: measurement with an optical spectrum analyzer of the FIU/SFIU


l For IN–>TC insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port with the optical power
of the TC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion
loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.
l For RC–>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port with the optical
power of the RC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The
insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.
l For IN–>TM insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port at 1510 nm with the
optical power of the TM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The
insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
l For RM–>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port at 1510 nm with
the optical power of the RM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The
insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
l For LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port with the optical
power of the TC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The
insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.
l For LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port with the
optical power of the RC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

l For LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port at 1510 nm
with the optical power of the TM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
l For LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port at 1510 nm
with the optical power of the RM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

5.10.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board


This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the
FOADM board.

Network with MR2+MR2


Figure 5-8 shows the diagram of a network with MR2+MR2.

Figure 5-8 Diagram of a network with MR2+MR2

1 2 3 4

MO
OA OA
OUT IN OUT
TC IN OUT IN MI OUT RC
IN F F
MR2 MR2 I
I
U U
MI
OA OA
OUT MO IN OUT IN
OUT RC OUT IN TC

O O O O
West T T T T East
U U U U

1: West FIU 2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end


3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: East FIU

Network with MR8V+MR8V


Figure 5-9 shows the diagram of a network with MR8V+MR8V.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Figure 5-9 Diagram of a network with MR8V+MR8V

1 2 3 4

OUT
MO OA
OA OUT
TC IN MI IN OUT RC
IN OUT VI F
F MR8V
MR8V I
I
U OUT U
MI
OA OA
MO VI OUT IN
IN TC
OUT RC OUT

O O O O O O
West T T T T T
East
T
U U U U U U

1: West FIU 2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end


3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: East FIU

Commissioning Requirements
The commissioning requirements for the FOADM board are as follows.
NOTE

For the specifications of the OAU board, see the Hardware Description.
l In the pass-through direction:
– For MR8V, adjust the VOA on the MR8V in the pass-through direction. Make the pass-
through wavelength meet the requirements for the input optical power of the OAU at
the transmit end.
– For MR2, adjust the VOA between MR2s. Make the pass-through wavelength meet the
requirements for the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end.
l In the drop wavelength direction, add an appropriate fixed optical attenuator at the input
end of the OTU. Make the drop wavelength meet the requirements for the input optical
power of the OTU.
l In the add wavelength direction:
– For MR8V, adjust the VOA between the OUT port on the OTU for adding wavelengths
and the MR8V to ensure gain flatness between the add wavelength and the pass-through
wavelength.
– For MR2, adjust the VOA between the OUT port on the OTU for adding wavelengths
and the MR2 to ensure gain flatness between the add wavelength and the pass-through
wavelength.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board


This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the
ROADM board.
This section describes how to commission the optical power of a ring network using ROADM
boards along the west-to-east signal flow. In general, the ring network uses the following
ROADM boards:
l ROAM+ROAM
l WSD9+WSM9
l WSD9+RMU9
l RDU9+WSM9
l WSMD4+WSMD4
l WSMD2+WSMD2

NOTE

l The requirements of the intra-ring grooming and inter-ring grooming of the WSM9, WSD9, RMU9,
RDU9, RDU9, WSMD2 and WSMD4 are the same.
l The automatic power adjustment mode can be chosen in creating optical cross-connection. For
applications not supporting automatic power adjustment, choose the manual power adjustment mode.
l The optical power of the OUT port at the receive end and the rated optical power of the IN port at the
transmit end of the OAU have their default values on the U2000.

5.11.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM


+ROAM)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with ROAM
+ROAM.

Network with ROAM+ROAM


Figure 5-10 shows the diagram of a network with ROAM+ROAM.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Figure 5-10 Diagram of a network with ROAM+ROAM

1 2 3 4

OAU

OAU
F OUT IN F
IN OUT
I ROAM ROAM I

OAU
OAU
U U
OUT IN OUT IN

OBU OBU

West East

D40 D40

O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

1: West FIU 2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end


3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: East FIU

NOTE

TDC and RDC of the OAU are connected to the port of the DCM for dispersion compensation or connected
directly.

Commissioning Requirements
l Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in add and pass-through wavelength
directions.
– In the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU
at the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of east
OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. The system
then automatically determines and adjusts the output optical power to ensure that the
input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add
wavelength.
– In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to
the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the rated optical power of the
IN port of east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength.
The system then automatically determines and adjusts the output optical power to ensure
that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for
the pass-through wavelength.
l Manual power adjustment is required in the drop wavelength direction. Configure the fixed
optical attenuator at the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end. Select the fixed optical
attenuator according to the input optical power of the OTU to ensure that the input optical
power meets the requirements. The VOA (in the dashed frame) between the ROAM and
D40 boards is used to adjust the input optical power of the optical amplifier to a value in
the nominal range. If the input optical power is in the nominal range when the VOA is not
added, then the VOA is not required.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

NOTE

l If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end,
the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an
avalanche photodiode (APD) is configured on the WDM side of the OTU board at the receive
end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
l If the PIN photodiode is configured at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame
are required.

5.11.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9


+WSM9)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with WSD9+WSM9.

Network with WSD9+WSM9


Figure 5-11 shows the diagram of a network with WSD9+WSM9.

Figure 5-11 Diagram of a network with WSD9+WSM9

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
1 2 3 4
D40 M40

OA WSD9 WSM9 OA
F IN OUT IN OUT F
I I
U U

OA WSM9 WSD9 OA
OUT IN OUT IN

M40 D40
West East

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

1: West FIU 2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end


3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: East FIU

NOTE

TDC and RDC of the OAU are connected to the port of the DCM for dispersion compensation or connected
directly.

Commissioning Requirements
Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in the add, drop, and pass-through wavelength
directions.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

l In the drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU
to the west OTU at the receive end. Set the optical power of the OUT port of the west OAU
at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. The system then
automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the
WSD9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU meets the requirements for the
drop wavelength.
NOTE

Automatic power adjustment can be realized when the WSD9 drops wavelength directly to the OTU
or through the MRx or D40 to the OTU.
l In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the
east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the optical power of the OUT port of
the west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. Set the
rated optical power of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input
power of single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the
attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 and WSM9 to ensure that the input
optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through
wavelength.
l I the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at
the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of the east
OAU at the transmit end to typical input power of single wavelength. The system then
automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the
WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the
requirements for the add wavelength.
NOTE

When the OTU board directly adds/drops wavelengths or when it adds/drops wavelengths through the
MRx board, a VOA (in the dashed frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit
end. When the OTU board adds wavelengths through the M40 board, the VOA is not required.
NOTE
MRx can be MR8, MR8V, MR4, or MR2.

5.11.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9


+RMU9)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with WSD9+RMU9.

Network with WSD9+RMU9


Figure 5-12 shows the diagram of a network with WSD9+RMU9.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Figure 5-12 Diagram of a network with WSD9+RMU9

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
1 2 3 4

OA
D40 MRx M40 T
O
A
ROA
OA WSD9 RMU9 OA
F IN OUT IN OUT F
I I
U U
IN
OA RMU9 WSD9 OA
OUT ROA OUT IN
T
O
A M40 MRx D40
West East
OA

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

1: West FIU 2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end


3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: East FIU

NOTE
MRx can be MR8, MR8V, MR4, or MR2.

Commissioning Requirements
l Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in the add, drop, and pass-through
wavelength (the wavelength is added either directly or through the MRx or M40V board)
directions.
– In the wavelength-dropping direction: Create a single-station optical cross-connection
from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end. The system then automatically
calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 board
to ensure that the optical power of each drop wavelength sent to the OTU board meets
the specification requirements.
NOTE

Automatic power adjustment can be used when the WSD9 drops a wavelength directly to the
OTU or drops a wavelength to the OTU board through the MRx or D40.
– In the pass-through direction: Create a single-station optical cross-connection from the
west FIU to the east FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the
attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 to ensure that the input optical
power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through
wavelength.
– In the wavelength-adding direction (the OTU board adds wavelengths directly): Create
a single-station optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the
east FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the
VOA in each port of the RMU9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at
the transmit end meets the requirements for the add wavelength.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

l When wavelengths are added through the MRx board or the M40 board, the optical power
needs to be manually adjusted.
When wavelengths are added through the M40/M40V board, an optical amplifier needs to
be configured between the TOA and ROA ports on the RMU9 board. And a VOA needs
to be configured between the ROA port and the optical amplifier. When wavelengths are
added through the MRx board, the TOA and the ROA ports on the RMU9 board are
connected to each other directly by a fiber.
Adjust the VOA between the OTU and the MRx or M40 board to ensure that the input
power flatness of the add wavelengths and the pass-through wavelengths on the east OAU
at the transmit end meet the system requirements.
l In the case of a network with WSD9+RMU9, to implement the APE function, the RMU9
board has certain requirements on configuration. These requirements are as follows:
– Configure the VA1 or VA4 board between the OTU and RMU9 boards when the OTU
board adds wavelength directly to the RMU9 board. In this case, the APE function can
be automatically implemented.
– When a multiplexer board, through which the OTU adds wavelength to the RMU9
board, needs to be configured, configure the M40V board. In this case, the APE function
can be automatically implemented.
– If the VA1, VA4, or M40V board is not used, the APE function cannot be implemented.

5.11.4 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (RDU9


+WSM9)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with RDU9+WSM9.

Network with RDU9+WSM9


Figure 5-13 shows the diagram of a network with RDU9+WSM9.

Figure 5-13 Diagram of a network with RDU9+WSM9

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
1 2 3 4
MRx D40V M40

OA RDU9 WSM9 OA
F IN OUT IN OUT F
I I
U U

OA WSM9 RDU9 OA
OUT IN OUT IN

M40 D40V MRx


West East

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

1: West FIU 2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: East FIU

NOTE

TDC and RDC of the OAU are connected to the port of the DCM for dispersion compensation or connected
directly.
NOTE
MRx can be MR8, MR8V, MR4, or MR2.

Commissioning Requirements
l Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in add wavelength, pass-through
wavelength, and drop wavelength through the MRx board or the D40V board.
– In the drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU
to the west OTU at the receive end. Set the optical power of the OUT port of the west
OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. The system
then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel
of the MRx board or the D40V board to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU
meets the requirements for the drop wavelength.
– In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to
the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the optical power of the OUT
port of the west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength,
and set the rated optical power of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to the
typical input power of single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and
adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSM9 to ensure that the input
optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-
through wavelength.
– In the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU
at the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of the
east OAU at the transmit end to typical input power of single wavelength. The system
then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel
of the WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end
meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
NOTE

When the OTU board directly adds/drops wavelengths or when it adds/drops wavelengths through the
MRx board, a VOA (in the dashed frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit
end. When the OTU board adds wavelengths through the M40 board, the VOA is not required.
l When wavelengths are dropped through the MRx board or the D40 board, the optical power
needs to be manually adjusted.
Adjust the VOA between the OTU and the MRx board or the D40 board to ensure that the
input optical power of the OTU meets the requirements for the drop wavelength.

5.11.5 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD4


+WSMD4)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSMD4
+WSMD4.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Network with WSMD4+WSMD4


This section describes the commissioning requirements for the WSMD4. In this section, the
network diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration purposes.
The commissioning requirements for multi-dimensional grooming are similar. Figure 5-14
shows the diagram of a network with WSMD4+WSMD4.

Figure 5-14 Diagram of a network with WSMD4+WSMD4


1 2 3 4

DM4
OA OA
F IN OUT IN AM4 OUT IN OUT F
I WSMD4 WSMD4 I
U U
AM4 IN
OA OA
OUT IN OUT DM1 DM4 OUT IN
AM1 AM1 DM1

OA OA
West East

D40 M40 M40 D40

O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

1: West FIU 2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end


3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: East FIU

NOTE

l In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the WSMD4 board are not shown.
These two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in the other direction.
l The single-wavelength signals are transmitted directly to the AMn optical port by the OTU board.

Commissioning Requirements
The commissioning requirements for the WSMD4 are as follows:
l In the drop wavelength direction, manual power adjustment is required.
You need to select and configure a fixed attenuator at the IN optical port of the OTU board
on the east and west receive ends respectively, based on the input optical power range of
the OTU board. By doing this, the input optical power to the OTU board can meet the OTU
design requirement. The optical power of the VOA (in the dashed frame) between the
demultiplexer and WSMD4 should be adjusted so that the input optical power is within the
nominal input range of the optical amplifier. If the input optical power is already within
the nominal input range of the optical amplifier before the VOA is added, the VOA is not
required.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

NOTE

l If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end,
the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD
module is configured on the WDM side of OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the
dashed frame are not required.
l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in
the dashed frame need to be configured.
l In pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the east
FIU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation
of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD4 to ensure that the input optical power of the
OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength.
l In add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU
and from the west OTU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and
adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD4 to ensure that the input
optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add
wavelength.
NOTE

When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA (in the solid frame)
needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengths
through the M40, the VOA is not required.

5.11.6 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD2


+WSMD2)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with WSMD2
+WSMD2.

Networking with WSMD2+WSMD2


This section describes the commissioning requirements of the WSMD2. In this section, the
networking diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration
purposes. The commissioning requirements for multi-dimensional grooming are similar. Figure
5-15 shows the diagram of a network with WSMD2+WSMD2.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Figure 5-15 Diagram of a network with WSMD2+WSMD2

O O O O
1 2 T T T T 3 4
U U U U

D40 M40
AM
DM
TC OUT OUT
IN EXPI OUT
OA OA
EXPO IN RC
IN IN OUT

F F
West East
I WSMD2 WSMD2 I
U U
IN IN
OUT OUT OUT EXPI
OA OA
RC IN EXPO OUT TC IN

DM
AM

M40 D40

O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

Fixed attenuator Variable attenuator

1: West FIU 2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end


3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: East FIU

NOTE

l The M40 or M40V can be used as the multiplexer board.


l If only one wavelength needs to be added, you can directly connect one OTU to the AM port of the
WSMD2.

Commissioning Requirements
The commissioning requirements of the WSMD2 are as follows:
l In the drop wavelength direction, manual power adjustment is required.
You need to select and configure a fixed attenuator at the IN optical port of the OTU board
on the east and west receive ends respectively, based on the input optical power range of
the OTU board. By doing this, the input optical power to the OTU board can meet the OTU
design requirements.
l In the pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the east
FIU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation
of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD2 to ensure that the input optical power of the
OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength.
l In the add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU
and from the west OTU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD2 to ensure that the input
optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add
wavelength.
NOTE

When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA needs to be added
before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengths through the M40,
the VOA is not required.
NOTE
MRx can be MR8, MR8V, MR4, or MR2.

5.11.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD9


+WSMD9)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSMD9
+WSMD9.

Network with WSMD9+WSMD9


This section describes the commissioning requirements for the WSMD9. In this section, the
network diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration purposes.
The commissioning requirements for multi-dimensional grooming are similar. Figure 5-16
shows the diagram of a network with WSMD9+WSMD9.

Figure 5-16 Diagram of a network with WSMD9+WSMD9

O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

D40 M40
DCM DCM
DM1 AM1
LIN SOUT IN EXPO SIN LOUT
TM EXPI OUT TM
RX RX
DAS1 TX WSMD9 WSMD9 TX DAS1
RM RM
EXPO IN

SIN OUT EXPI SOUT LIN


LOUT
AM1 DM1
DCM DCM
M40 D40

O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

NOTE

l Optical ports AM2–AM8 and DM2–DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards
in other dimensions.

Commissioning Requirements
l In the drop wavelength direction, manual power adjustment is required.
You need to select and configure a fixed attenuator at the IN optical port of the OTU board
on the east and west receive ends respectively, based on the input optical power range of
the OTU board. By doing this, the input optical power to the OTU board can meet the OTU
design requirement.
l In pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the east
FIU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation
of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD9 to ensure that the input optical power of the
OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength.
l In add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU
and from the west OTU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and
adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD9 to ensure that the input
optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add
wavelength.

5.12 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM


The single-wavelength input optical power of the DCM must be equal to or lower than –3 dBm.

Prerequisites
Fiber connections on the DCM must be established properly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, fiber jumper

Procedure
Step 1 Measure the input optical power of the DCM. The single-wavelength input optical power must
be equal to or lower than –3 dBm.

Step 2 Measure the output optical power of the DCM.

Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss of the DCM. The insertion loss should be within the specified range.
Otherwise, replace the DCM.

Insertion loss of the DCM = Input optical power of the DCM – Output optical power of the DCM

----End

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Related Information
For more information about the specifications of the insertion loss of the DCM, see the Product
Description.

5.13 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on


10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System
This section uses Project X as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning
procedures for the OTM, OLA and OADM stations.

CAUTION
Ensure that the ports and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean. Otherwise, the system
performance is affected.

l All the channels must be accessed with service signals or forced to emit light before optical
power commissioning. Once all the OTUs can emit light normally, start the commissioning
station by station.
l Enable the performance monitoring of NEs during optical power commissioning. Compare
the value reported by the NE and the value tested by the instruments. Ensure that the two
optical power values are the same.
NOTE

The optical power is queried by using the U2000. The difference between the U2000 value and the value
tested by instruments should be within 1 dB.

5.13.1 Example Description


This section describes the network of project X.
Figure 5-17 shows the network diagram of project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E and F are the
NG WDM systems which form the ring network. Among these ONEs, the ONE A and ONE C
are the back-to-back OTM stations. The ONE B, ONE D and ONE F are the OLA stations. And
the ONE E is the OADM station.
Station E can use the FOADM boards or ROADM boards to form the network.
If station E uses the FOADM boards, see 5.10.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM
Board for its commissioning description.
If station E uses the ROADM boards, see 5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM
Board for its commissioning description.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Figure 5-17 Network diagram of Project X


Station A 2OTM Station F OLA Station E OADM

135km/39dB 85km/27dB

55km/15dB 60km/16dB

80km/26dB 100km/30dB

Station B OLA Station C 2OTM Station D OLA

: OTM :OLA : OADM

NOTE

In this commissioning example, the signal flow from west to east is used as an example to illustrate the
commissioning procedure. The commissioning method for the signal flow from east to west is the same as
the commissioning method for the signal flow from west to east.
NOTE

As shown in Figure 5-17, 2OTM means back-to-back OTM

Table 5-10 shows the incident optical power requirements based on a 10Gbit/s single-
wavelength system.

Table 5-10 Requirements on incident optical power

Module Type Number of G.652 SSMF G.655 LEAF G.653


Wavelengths

NRZ/(D)RZ 40 +4 +4 -5

80 +1 +1 -7

The optical power listed in this table is expressed in dBm.

NOTE

If modules or fibers of another type need to be used, confirm the incident optical power with the product manager
or network designer.

5.13.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM


Station
This section describes how to commission the optical power at the transmit end of an OTM
station along the west-to-east signal flow.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Prerequisites
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical
attenuator, VOA, U2000

Set-up Diagram

Figure 5-18 Fiber connection of OTM station A on the OptiX OSN 8800
Station A
D01 Tx Rx M01
DCM LQM LQM
TDC
RDC D02 M02
LINE C SYS M
TC IN D LOM LOM
R OAU1 4 OBU1
P 4
IN IN OUT 0 OUT OUT RC OUT
C 0
D40 M40 IN
LSX LSX
F TM RM1 RM F
TM2
West To F I SC2 I To B East
U RM TM1 TM U
M01 D01 RM2
Rx Tx
LQM LQM
M02 D02
RC M LOM LOM D D
OBU1 4 4 OBU1 C
0 M
0 TC IN
M40 IN OUT
OUT OUT IN OUT D40 IN
LSX LSX

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Figure 5-19 Fiber connection of OTM station A on the OptiX OSN 6800
Station A
D01 Tx Rx M01
DCM LQM LQM
TDC
RDC D02 M02
LINE C SYS M
TC IN D LOM LOM
R OAU1 4 OBU1
P 4
IN IN OUT 0 OUT OUT RC OUT
C 0
D40 M40 IN
LSX LSX
F TM RM1 RM F
TM2
West To F I SC2 I To B East
U RM TM1 TM U
M01 D01 RM2
Rx Tx
LQM LQM
M02 D02
RC M LOM LOM D D
OBU1 4 4 OBU1 C
0 M
0 TC IN
M40 IN OUT
OUT OUT IN OUT D40 IN
LSX LSX

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Figure 5-20 Fiber connection of OTM station A on the OptiX OSN 3800

Tx Rx
L L
Q 4
M G
Station A IN OUT

DCM
D1 D2 A1 A2
LINE C SY S TDC RDC
R
P OAU1 MR2 OBU1
C IN TC IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT RC OUT

TM RM1 TM2 RM
FI SC2 FI
West To F U U To B East
RM TM1 RM2 TM

D
OBU1 MR2 OBU1 C
M
OUT RC OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN TC IN
D1 D2 A1 A2

L IN L OUT
Q 4
M G
Tx Rx

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical
fiber should be loosely inserted to the input port Rx on the client side of the OTU.

Step 2 Send the client signal to the east OTU.

Step 3 Query the bar code on the front panel or manufacturing information of the board to obtain the
optical module information on the client side of the OTU.

Step 4 Obtain the launched optical power and optical module information on the client side. Compare
the launched optical power of the client equipment with the received optical power on the client
side of the OTU. If required, prepare the fixed optical attenuator for later use.

Step 5 Measure the optical power of the fiber jumper connected to the RX port on the client side of the
OTU by using an optical power meter.

Step 6 Install a fixed optical attenuator before the input port on the client side of the OTU to ensure
that the input optical power of the OTU meets requirements.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 7 If the optical power of all input ports on the OTU meets the specification requirements, insert a
fiber into the RX port on the OTU and record the input optical power at the RX port in the
commissioning record.

Step 8 Check whether the OUT ports on the WDM sides of all the east OTUs emit light. If not, check
whether lasers on the WDM sides of the OTU are enabled.

Step 9 Measure the optical power at the OUT port on the WDM side of the OTU by using an optical
power meter.

Step 10 Measure the input optical power at the following port by using an optical power meter, and
record the value in the commissioning record. If the variance between the optical power of the
port and the optical power at the OUT port on the WDM side of the OTU is greater than 1 dB,
check whether fibers are routed properly and whether the fibers are clean.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, measure the input optical power at the Mn port on the M40 by using
an optical power meter.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, measure the input optical power at the Mn port on the M40 by using
an optical power meter.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, measure the input optical power at the A1 and A2 port on the MR2
by using an optical power meter.

Step 11 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the following board to scan the
multiplexed signal. Adjust the attenuation of the VOA connected to the output port on the OTU
to adjust the optical power flatness of add wavelengths. In this manner, ensure that the single-
wavelength output optical power of the M40 is consistent with the nominal single-wavelength
input optical power of the OA at the transmit end.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the M40
board.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the M40
board.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the MR2
board.

Step 12 Record the optical power of each wavelength and multiplexed signal and calculate the insertion
loss of each wavelength for the following board. Check whether the insertion loss of each
wavelength meets the requirements after the wavelength passes through the board. If the optical
power is abnormal, check the fiber connection to the Mn port.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the M40 board.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the M40 board.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the MR2 board.

Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the West-Receive-to-East-Transmit
OBU1 by using a fiber jumper. Then scan the multiplexed signal and measure the optical power
at the IN port on the OBU1.

Step 14 Measure the optical power of each wavelength at the OUT port on the OBU1 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer. Check whether the mean output optical power of a single wavelength is in
the standard range.

Step 15 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1 according to the following formula: Gain =
Output optical power of a single wavelength - Input optical power of a single wavelength. The
gain flatness of a single wavelength must be lower than 2.0 dB.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 16 Record the optical power at IN and OUT ports, input and output optical power, and gain of each
wavelength of the OBU1.
Step 17 Query the input and output optical power of a multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the
U2000. The variance between the power displayed on the U2000 and the power measured by
using the optical spectrum analyzer must be smaller than 2.0 dB. Otherwise, replace the board.
Step 18 Measure the input optical power at the RC port on the FIU by using an optical power meter. If
the variance between the optical power at RC port on the FIU and the optical power at the OUT
port on the OBU1 is greater than 1 dB, check whether the fibers are routed properly and whether
the fibers are clean.
Step 19 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU by using an optical power meter
(during the test, the RM port must be disconnected). Calculate the insertion loss from the RC to
OUT ports on the FIU. The insertion loss must be equal to or lower than 1.0 dB.
Step 20 Measure the output optical power at the TM2 port on the SC2 by using an optical power meter,
and then measure the input optical power at the RM port on the FIU. If the variance between the
optical power at the two ports is greater than 1 dB, check whether the fibers are routed properly
and whether the fibers are clean.
Step 21 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU by using an optical power meter
(during the test, the RC port must be disconnected). Calculate the insertion loss from the RM to
OUT ports on the FIU. The insertion loss must be equal to or lower than 1.5 dB.
Step 22 Measure the output optical power on the ODF side. Compare the value with the output optical
power at the OUT port on the FIU to check whether the fiber is correctly routed.

----End

5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA


This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow at an
OLA station.

Prerequisites
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.
The optical power commissioning of station A at the transmit end must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical
attenuator, VOA, U2000

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Set-up Diagram

Figure 5-21 Fiber connection of OLA station B

Station B
D
C OBU1
M
IN TC IN OUT RC OUT

F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
I SC2 I To C East
West To A
U RM TM1 RM2 TM U

D
C
OBU1 M
OAU1
OUT RC OUT IN OUT IN TC IN
RDC TDC

Fix optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Procedure
Step 1 Test the optical power of the IN port on the west FIU with an optical power meter. Compare the
value with optical power of the OUT port on the east FIU of station A to calculate the line
attenuation between station A and station B on the line side. If the actual line attenuation is larger
than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determine whether
the cable attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are faulty, clear the
fault by following the appropriate procedures.

Step 2 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power of the TM port on the
west FIU at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values in
the commissioning record.

Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TM port of the west FIU. The insertion loss
should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Step 4 Test the input optical power of the RM1 port on the SC2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Add a proper attenuator to make the input power less than –3dBm. Record the input optical
power of the RM1 port in the commissioning record.

Step 5 Test the output optical power of the TM2 port of the SC2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Record the output optical power of the TM2 port in the commissioning record.

Step 6 Test the input optical power of the RM port and the output optical power of the OUT port on
the east FIU at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting the fiber to
the RC port of the FIU board). Record the optical power values in the commissioning record.

Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertion
loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 8 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power of the TC port on the
west FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power
values in the commissioning record.
Step 9 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TC port on the west FIU. The insertion loss
should be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.
Step 10 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN port on the West-Receive-
to-East-Transmit OBU to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the VOA before the OBU to
commission the mean input optical power of single wavelength of the OBU to nominal value.
Step 11 Test and record the input and output optical power of the DCM. Calculate the insertion loss of
the VOA and DCM.
Step 12 The optical power commissioning method of the OBU is the same as that at the transmit end of
the OTM. For more information, see Step 13 through Step 17 in 5.13.2 Commissioning
Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station.
Step 13 Test the input optical power of the RC port and the output optical power of the OUT port of the
east FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting the
fiber to the RM port of the FIU board). Record the optical power values in the commissioning
record.
Step 14 Calculate the insertion loss from the RC port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertion loss
should be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

----End

5.13.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End


This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow at the
receive end of an OTM station.

Prerequisites
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.
The optical power commissioning of station B must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical
attenuator, VOA, U2000

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Set-up Diagram

Figure 5-22 Fiber connection of OTM station C on the OptiX OSN 8800
Station C
D01 Tx Rx M01
TDC RDC LQM LQM
D02 M02
IN D IN LOM LOM M IN RC
D
OAU1 C OBU1 OBU1
4 4
IN TC OUT M 0 OUT OUT OUT
0
D40 M40
LSX LSX
West F TM RM1 TM2 RM F East
To B I SC2 I
To D
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
M01 Rx Tx D01
LQM LQM
OUT M M02 D02
OUT LOM LOM D OUT TC
OBU1 4 4 OAU1
OUT RC IN 0 IN IN IN
0
M40 RDC TDC
D40
LSX LSX DCM

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Figure 5-23 Fiber connection of OTM station C on the OptiX OSN 6800
Station C
D01 Tx Rx M01
TDC RDC LQM LQM
D02 M02
IN D IN LOM LOM M IN RC
D
OAU1 C OBU1 OBU1
4 4
IN TC OUT M 0 OUT OUT OUT
0
D40 M40
LSX LSX
West F TM RM1 TM2 RM F East
To B I SC2 I
To D
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
M01 Rx Tx D01
LQM LQM
OUT M M02 D02
OUT LOM LOM D OUT TC
OBU1 4 4 OAU1
OUT RC IN 0 IN IN IN
0
M40 RDC TDC
D40
LSX LSX DCM

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Figure 5-24 Fiber connection of OTM station C on the OptiX OSN 3800

Tx Rx
L L
Q 4
M G
Station C IN OUT

TDC RDC D1 D2 A1 A2
D
OAU1 C OBU1 MR2 OBU1
IN TC OUT M IN OUT IN OUT RC OUT

F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
West To B I SC2 I To D East
U RM TM1 RM2 TM U

OBU1 MR2 OAU1


OUT RC OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN TC IN
D1 D2 A1 A2
DCM
RDC TDC

L IN L OUT
Q 4
M G
Tx Rx

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to fiber connection diagram. The optical
fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.
Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.13.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM ports on
the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 4 For optical power commissioning of the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.13.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of OLA.
Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT ports
on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA
Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC ports on
the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 7 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow. Then
measure the optical power and the OSNR of each channel in WDM mode. Or connect the INx
port of the MCA4/MCA8 board to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow. Then
measure the optical power and the OSNR of each channel on the U2000 by completing the
following operations.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

l Log in to U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the
NE is displayed.
l Right-click the NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
l Select the desired MCA4/MCA8 board, and choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum
Analysis from the left-hand Function Tree.
l Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query.
l In Spectrum Data, query Optical Power (dBm) and OSNR (dB) for each current
wavelength display.
NOTE

You can also connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN port on the West-Receive-to-
East-Transmit OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the optical power and OSNR of each wavelength
of the IN port on the OAU1.

Step 8 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the OUT port on the West-Receive-
to-East-Transmit OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the gain of the OAU1 on the
U2000 to commission the launched optical power to the maximum value for single wavelength
for the OAU1.
NOTE

For the methods and requirements of gain adjustment for the OAU, see 5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of
EDFA Optical Amplifier Board.

Step 9 Calculate the gains of each wavelength of the OAU1. Record the output optical power, gain of
each wavelength, and the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal.

Step 10 Check whether the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal is compliant to the
typical value by using the U2000.

Step 11 The tested OSNR of the output signals for the optical amplifier at the receive end must be higher
than the designed OSNR in the actual project.

Step 12 The commissioning method of the West-Receive-to-East-Transmit OBU and DCM is the same
as that of the OLA station. For specific procedures, see Step 10 through Step 12 in 5.13.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper for the following port on the west
board to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the input optical power of each wavelength.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the D40
board.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the D40
board.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the MR2
board.

Step 14 Test the output optical power of each wavelength for the following port by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the Dn port on
the D40 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the Dn port on
the D40 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the D1 and D2
ports on the MR2 board by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 15 Calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength for the following boards. The insertion loss must
satisfy the following requirements and the maximum difference between the insertion loss values
must be lower than 2.0 dB. If the difference is greater than 2.0 dB, replace the board with a new
board.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, the insertion loss must be lower than 6.5 dB.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, the insertion loss must be lower than 6.5 dB.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, the insertion loss must be lower than 1.5 dB.

Step 16 Test the input optical power for the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU. Check whether the
optical power for the IN port on the OTU is within the standard range.
NOTE

If a PIN receiver is used on the WDM side of the OTU, no fixed optical attenuator is needed. If an APD
is used on the WDM side of the OTU, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be added to ensure that the
input optical power of the IN port of the OTU meets the requirements. If the optical power does not meet
the requirements, add, change or remove the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the received optical
power is within the standard range.

Step 17 Securely insert the optical fiber into the IN port of the OTU after the input optical power meets
the requirements.

Step 18 Test the output optical power on the client side of the OTU and the optical power of the ODF.
Compare the two values to check whether the fiber jumper on the client side is correctly
connected. The fiber attenuation must be lower than 1 dB.

Step 19 Query the input and output optical power of each OTU by using the U2000. The difference
between the values on the U2000 and the test values must be lower than 2.0 dB. The number of
error corrections within 15 minutes for the board with FEC function must be less than 100,000.
If the number of error corrections is more than 100,000, locate and correct the fault.

Step 20 If the client equipment accessed is new, test the 24-hour network-wide bit errors of the client
equipment. If the client equipment is not connected or not used, loop back the TX and RX ports
on the client side of all OTUs for station C on the ODF side. In addition, a fixed optical attenuator
needs to be added before the RX port.
NOTE

Section 5.13.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station, 5.13.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA and 5.13.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive
End show the commissioning process for the optical multiplex section. The commissioning for the
multiplex sections at OTM and OLA stations are similar to these.

----End

5.13.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (Multiplexer


Board+Demultiplexer Board)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the FOADM station along the
west-to-east signal flow.

Prerequisites
Fiber connections and network configuration must be complete.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, fibers, fixed optical attenuator,
variable optical attenuator (VOA), U2000 computer

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 5-25 Fiber connection diagram of the FOADM station

Station E

DCM
D M
TDC
LINE C SYS RDC
IN 4 D03 Tx Rx M03 4
IN RC
TC OTU OTU
R OAU1 0 0 OBU1
P D02 M02
IN IN OUT OUT OUT OUT
C OTU OTU
D01 M01
OTU OTU
F TM RM1 RM F
TM2
West To F I SC2 I To B East
U RM TM1 TM U
M01 D01 RM2
Rx Tx
OTU OTU
M02 D02
OUT OTU OTU
OUT OUT D TC
M M03 D03 D
OBU1 OTU OTU OBU1 C
OUT RC 4 4 IN M IN
IN IN
0 0

Fixed optical attenuator Optical distribution frame (ODF)


VOA

Procedure
Step 1 For information on how to commission the received optical power of the FOADM station using
the multiplexer board and demultiplexer board, see 5.13.4 Commissioning Optical Power of
OTM Receive End.

Step 2 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical port on the M40 to scan the multiplexed
signals. Based on the tested optical power for each pass-through wavelength, adjust the VOA
in each pass-through channel. Adjust the optical power flatness of the pass-through wavelength
so that the single-wavelength optical power input to the OBU1 is consistent with the nominal
single-wavelength input optical power.

Step 3 The optical power at the transmit end of the FOADM station is commissioned the same way as
the optical power at the transmit end of the OTM station. For more information about the
commissioning procedure, see 5.13.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the
OTM Station.

----End

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

5.13.6 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MRx+MRx)


This section describes how to commission the optical power along the west-to-east signal flow
in the FOADM station using the MR2+MR2 scheme.

Prerequisites
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.

The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical
attenuator, VOA, U2000

This section uses station E using the MRx boards as an example to describe the optical power
commissioning procedure for an FOADM station.

NOTE
MRx can be MR8, MR8V, MR4, or MR2.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, MR8V is considered as an example.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, MR8V is considered as an example.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, MR2 is considered as an example.

Set-up Diagram

Figure 5-26 Fiber connection of FOADM station E on the OptiX OSN 8800

Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM

F D VI MO OUT OUT F
C OBU1 OBU1
I MI
I
TC M IN IN RC
To D U OUT U To F
MR8V MR8V
RC IN MI VI
OBU1 OAU1
OUT OUT MO OUT TC
RDC TDC
OUT IN
DCM
O O O O O O
West T T T T T T East
U U U U U U

Fix optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Figure 5-27 Fiber connection of FOADM station E on the OptiX OSN 6800
Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM

F D VI MO OUT OUT F
C OBU1 OBU1
I MI
I
TC M IN IN RC
To D U OUT U To F
MR8V MR8V
RC IN MI VI
OBU1 OAU1
OUT OUT MO OUT TC
RDC TDC
OUT IN
DCM
O O O O O O
West T T T T T T East
U U U U U U

Fix optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Figure 5-28 Fiber connection of FOADM station E on the OptiX OSN 3800

Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM

F D MO MO OUT F
C OBU1 OBU1
I I
TC M OUT IN IN MI IN OUT RC U To F East
West To D U
MR2 MR2 MR2

MI OUT IN
MI
OBU1 OAU1
IN
RC OUT IN OUT OUT MO TC

OUT RDC TDC IN


DCM
L L L L L L
Q 4 4 4 Q 4
M G G G M G

Fix optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board based on the fiber connection diagram. The optical
fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.13.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 3 For information about how to commission the optical power and calculate the insertion loss of
the IN and TM ports on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical
Power of OLA.

Step 4 For information about how to commission the optical power of the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5
in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 5 For information about how to commission the optical power and calculate the insertion loss of
the RM and OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical
Power of OLA.

Step 6 For information about how to commission the optical power and calculate the insertion loss of
the IN and TC ports on the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical
Power of OLA.

Step 7 The commissioning method for the OAU at the receive end and the DCM is the same as the
commissioning method for the OLA station. For more information, see Step 10 through Step 12
in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
NOTE

The TDC and RDC ports on the OAU1 can connect to a DCM module. After input optical power
commissioning, set the gain to adjust the output optical power to the standard value. The optical power,
gain and OSNR are tested the same way as described previously.

Step 8 Test the output optical power of the following ports in the west after commissioning the west
OBU1 at the receive end. Determine the optical port with the highest output optical power.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the output optical power of the D1 - D8 ports on the MR8V
boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receiving end.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the output optical power of the D1 - D8 ports on the MR8V
boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receiving end.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the output optical power of the D1 and D2 ports on the two
MR2 boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receiving
end.

Step 9 Add a proper fixed optical attenuator at the receive end of the OTU to ensure that the input
optical power at the IN port on the OTU meets the requirements.
NOTE

l The optimal range of the input optical power of the OTU is from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload
point – 5) dBm.
l For the specific specifications of OTUs, see the Product Description.

Step 10 Insert the optical fiber into the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU after the input optical power
meets the requirements.

Step 11 Test the optical power at the following ports by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the optical power of the IN, D1 - D8 and MO ports on the
west MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

l For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the optical power of the IN, D1 - D8 and MO ports on the
west MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of the IN, D1, D2 and MO ports on the
west MR2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 12 Calculate the following drop insertion loss.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to any one of
the D1 - D8 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on the
west MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 4 dB.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to any one of
the D1 - D8 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on the
west MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 4 dB.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the D1 port
and to the D2 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on the
first west MR2. The insertion loss must be lower than 1.5 dB.
Step 13 For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of each wavelength of the IN, D1, D2 and MO
ports on the second MR2 of west. Calculate the drop insertion loss of the MR2 in the same way.
Step 14 Test the input optical power of the east OBU1 at the transmit end.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, adjust the value of the VOA between the east MR8V and the
west MR8V at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical power
of the pass-through wavelength of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end
conforms to the standard value.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, adjust the value of the VOA between the east MR8V and the
west MR8V at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical power
of the pass-through wavelength of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end
conforms to the standard value.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, adjust the attenuation of the VOA between the east MR2 and the
west MR2 at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical power
of the pass through wavelength for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end
conforms to the standard value.
Step 15 Test the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU with an optical power meter.
Step 16 Test the input optical power for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end by using an
optical spectrum analyzer. Adjust the attenuation of the VOA on the OTU to ensure that the
input optical power of the add wavelength for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end
conforms to the typical input power for a single wavelength.
Step 17 Test the optical power of the following ports by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the optical power of the MI, A1 - A8 and OUT ports on the
east MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the optical power of the MI, A1 - A8 and OUT ports on the
east MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of the MI, A1, A2 and OUT ports on the
east MR2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 18 Calculate the add insertion loss as follows.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the add insertion loss from any one of the A1 - A8 ports
to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to OUT port on the east
MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 6 dB.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

l For the OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the add insertion loss from any one of the A1 - A8 ports
to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to OUT port on the east
MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 6 dB.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the add insertion loss from the A1 port and the A2 port
to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to the OUT port on the
east MR2. The insertion loss must be lower than 1.5 dB.
Step 19 Test the optical power for each output wavelength at the OUT port on the east OBU1 by using
an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 20 Calculate the gain for each wavelength of the OBU1. Gain = Output optical power of a single
wavelength – Input optical power of a single wavelength. The gain flatness for each wavelength
must be lower than 2 dB.
Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signals of the OBU1 by using the
U2000. The difference between the value on the U2000 and the measured value must be lower
than 2 dB.
Step 22 For information about how to commission the optical power and insertion loss of the RC and
the OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power
of OLA.

----End

5.13.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM+ROAM)


This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in the
ROADM station in the ROAM+ROAM mode.

Prerequisites
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.
The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical
attenuator, VOA, U2000

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Testing Diagram (Networking with ROAM+ROAM)

Figure 5-29 Fiber connection of ROADM station E (networking with ROAM)

Station E

TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN OUT
TC EXPO RC
F OBU1 OBU1 F
To D IN OUT EXPI IN OUT To F
I RC ROAM
EXPI
ROAM TC I
U OBU1 OAU1 U East
West EXPO
OUT IN OUT IN
M M M M
DM DM RDC TDC
0 0 0 0
OUT 1 2 1 2 IN
OBU OBU DCM

D40 D40

L L L L
Q O Q O
M G M G

Fix optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical
fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.13.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM ports on
the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.13.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of OLA.

Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT ports
on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC ports on
the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 7 The commissioning method of west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of the
OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of
OLA.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 8 Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU, from the west FIU to the
west OTU. Create the optical cross-connection from east OTU at the transmit end to the east
FIU on the U2000.

Step 9 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN ports for the west OTUs individually.
Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power of the west OTUs
meets the requirements.
NOTE

l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the
dashed frame need to be configured. If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical
amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD module
is configured on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame
are not required. Instead, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be configured.
l There are two types of optical receive modules: PIN and APD. The specific type can be identified
through the bar code information pasted on the front panel of the module. The APD also has a
corresponding APD warning identifier on the panel of the board.

Step 10 After ensuring that the optical power meets the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the
input port on the WDM side of the OTU.

Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN, DM and EXPO ports for the west ROAM with an optical power
meter. Measure the input optical power at the IN port and the single-wavelength output optical
power at the Dn port of the D40.

Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DM port. Calculate the pass-through
loss from the IN port to the EXPO port of the west ROAM. Calculate the insertion loss for the
D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
NOTE

l For the ROAM board, Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation
value of the inside VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about the
insertion loss of the ROAM board.

Step 13 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths for the ROAM.
Method 1 is recommended.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The ROAM automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for east OTU
and west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port
for the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single
wavelength.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the ROAM board. This ensures
that the average input power of the IN port for the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal
to the typical input power of a single wavelength.

Step 14 Test the optical power of the EXPI, Mn and OUT ports for the east ROAM by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.

Step 15 Calculate the add insertion loss from the Mn port to the OUT port and the pass-through loss
from the EXPI port to the OUT port for the east ROAM.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

NOTE

l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the inside
VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about the
insertion loss of the ROAM board.

Step 16 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength optical power for each output
wavelength of the OUT port for east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 17 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OBU1. The gain flatness for each wavelength
should be less than 2 dB.
Step 18 Query the input and output optical power for the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the
U2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than
2 dB.
Step 19 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT ports
of the east FIU, sees Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

----End

5.13.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)


This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in the
ROADM station in the WSD9+WSM9 mode.

Prerequisites
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.
The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical
attenuator, VOA, U2000

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSD9+WSM9)

Figure 5-30 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSD9+WSM9)

L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G

Station E

D40 M40

TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM

DM AM
West F EXPO F East
OBU1 WSD9 WSM9 OBU1
I I
To D TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT IN OUT RC U To F
U

EXPI OUT
OBU1 WSM9 WSD9 OAU1
EXPO IN
RC OUT IN OUT TC
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT DCM IN
M40 D40

L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G

Fix optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength
at the same time.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical
fiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.
Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.13.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM ports on
the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.13.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of OLA.
Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the RM and OUT ports
on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TC ports on
the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of the
OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of
OLA.
Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to west OTU at the receive end, from
the west FIU to the east FIU, and from east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the
U2000.
Step 9 Adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelength. Method 1 is recommended during
deployment commissioning.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The WSD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop wavelength. This ensures
that the average input power of the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end meets the
requirements.
NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical
port on the OTU. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-
tune the power.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the drop wavelength
of the WSD9 board. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port of the west
OTU at the receive end meets the requirements.
Step 10 Test the optical power of IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets the
requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU.
Step 11 Adjust the optical power for the west pass-through wavelength. Method 1 is recommended
during deployment commissioning.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The WSD9 and the WSM9 automatically adjust the optical power for the west pass-through
wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through wavelengths for the
IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single
wavelength.
NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical
port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use the second method
to fine-tune the optical power.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the pass-through
wavelength of the WSD9 and WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of
pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to
the typical input power of a single wavelength.
Step 12 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west WSD9 board by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 13 Test the input and output optical power of the D40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the D40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
NOTE

The insertion loss of D40 = the input optical power of D40 – the output optical power of D40

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn port and the pass-through loss
from the IN port to the EXPO port of the east WSD9.
NOTE

l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the inside
VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSD9 board should be equal to or
less than 8 dB.

Step 15 Adjust the output power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. Method 1 is recommended
during deployment commissioning.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU.
This ensures that the average input power of add wavelengths for the IN port on the east
OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of single wavelength.
NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical
port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-
tune the optical power.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA corresponding to the pass-through
wavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through
wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical
input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE

When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA (in the solid frame)
needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengths
through the M40, the VOA is not required.
NOTE
MRx can be MR8, MR8V, MR4, or MR2.

Step 16 Test the input and output optical power of the M40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the M40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.

Step 17 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports of the WSM9 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.

Step 18 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn port to the OUT port. Calculate the
pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port of the WSM9.
NOTE

l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the
inside VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSM9 board should be equal
to or less than 8 dB.

Step 19 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength for each output wavelength of the
OUT port for the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness of each wavelength should
be less than 2 dB.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the
U2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than
2 dB.
Step 22 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT ports
of the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

----End

5.13.9 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)


This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in the
ROADM station in the WSD9+RMU9 mode.

Prerequisites
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.
The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical
attenuator, VOA, U2000

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSD9+RMU9)

Figure 5-31 Fiber connections of ROADM station E on the OptiX OSN 8800

L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G

Station E

D40 MR8V

TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 TM OUT
TOA
DM AM
F EXPO ROA F
OBU1 WSD9 RMU9 OBU1
I I
TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT OUT RC U To F East
West To D U
IN

OUT EXPI OUT


OBU1 RMU9 WSD9 OAU1
ROA EXPO IN IN TC
RC OUT
IN AM DM RDC TDC
OUT TOA IN
MR8V D40
DCM

L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G

Fix optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Figure 5-32 Fiber connections of ROADM station E on the OptiX OSN 6800

L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G

Station E

D40 MR8V

TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 TM OUT
TOA
DM AM
F EXPO ROA F
OBU1 WSD9 RMU9 OBU1
I I
TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT OUT RC U To F East
West To D U
IN

OUT EXPI OUT


OBU1 RMU9 WSD9 OAU1
ROA EXPO IN IN TC
RC OUT
IN AM DM RDC TDC
OUT TOA IN
MR8V D40
DCM

L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G

Fix optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Figure 5-33 Fiber connections of ROADM station E on the OptiX OSN 3800

L L L L L L L L
Q Q S Q Q Q S Q
M G X G M G X G

Station E

D40 MR4

TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 TM OUT
TOA
DM AM
F TC OUT EXPO OUT F
ROA
OBU1 WSD9 RMU9 OBU1
I I
IN IN EXPI OUT RC U To F East
West To D U
IN
RC OUT EXPI IN
OUT
OBU1 RMU9 WSD9 OAU1
OUT ROA EXPO IN
TC
IN AM DM RDC TDC
OUT TOA IN
MR4 D40
DCM

L L L L L L L L
Q Q S Q Q Q S Q
M G X G M G X G

Fix optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength
at the same time.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical
fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.
Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.13.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TM ports on
the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.13.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of OLA.
Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the RM and OUT ports
on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TC ports on
the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of the
OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of
OLA.
Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to west OTU at the receive end, from
the west FIU to the east FIU on the U2000. Create the optical cross-connection from the east
OTU that is connected with RMU9 directly at the transmit end to the east FIU.
Step 9 Adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelengths. Method 1 is recommended during
deployment commissioning.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The WSD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop wavelength from the west
OTU. This ensures that the input power for the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end
is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical
port on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-
tune the optical power.
2. Method 2: Set the attenuation value of each drop channel of the WSD9 on the U2000.
Ensure that the input power for the IN port of the west OTU is equal to the typical input
power of a single wavelength.
Step 10 Test the optical power of the IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets
the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU.
Step 11 Test the input and output optical power of the west D40. Calculate the insertion loss of the D40
board, which should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
Step 12 Adjust the optical power of the west pass-through wavelengths. Method 1 is recommended
during deployment commissioning.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The WSD9 automatically adjusts the corresponding VOA for each pass-through
wavelength. This ensures that the input power of the single pass-through wavelength for
the OBU1 is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical
port on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-
tune the power.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Test
the input power of the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Manually set the
corresponding VOA of each pass-through wavelength of the west WSD9. This ensures that
the input power of the single pass-through wavelength for the OBU1 is equal to the typical
input power of a single wavelength.
Step 13 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west WSD9 board by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DM port and the pass-through loss from
IN port to the EXPO port of the WSD9 board.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

NOTE

l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the inside
VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSD9 board should be equal to or
less than 8 dB.

Step 15 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths for the east OTU board (the OTU is directly
connected to the RMU9 board). Method 1 is recommended during deployment commissioning.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The RMU9 automatically adjusts the corresponding VOA for each add wavelength of each
east OTU. This ensures that the input power the single add wavelength of the OBU1 is
equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical
port on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power as required, use method 2 to
fine-tune the optical power.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Test
the input power of east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. M set the
corresponding VOA of each add wavelength for the east OTU in the east RMU9. This
ensures that the input power of the single add wavelength of the OBU1 is equal to the typical
input power of a single wavelength.

Step 16 For wavelengths added through the RMU9 after the wavelengths are multiplexed by the MRx,
perform the following substeps:
NOTE
MRx can be MR8, MR8V, MR4, or MR2.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, MR8V is considered as an example.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, MR8V is considered as an example.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, MR4 is considered as an example.
1. Set the attenuation of the corresponding RMU9-imbedded VOA connected to the MRx to
3 dB.
2. Set the VOA attenuation between the MRx and OTU to the minimum.
3. Determine the smallest input optical power value for wavelengths added through the MRx
to the IN port of the OBU1. Adjust the optical power for each of the other wavelengths to
the smallest input optical power value to flatten the optical power.
4. Set the attenuation of the corresponding RMU9-imbedded VOA connected to the MRx to
obtain the typical input power of a single wavelength of the OBU1 added through the MRx.

Step 17 Test the input and output optical power of MRx, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the MRx board must satisfy the following requirements.
l For the MR8V board, the insertion loss for the MR8V board should be equal to or less than
3.5 dB.
l For the MR4 board, the insertion loss for the MR4 board should be equal to or less than
1.5 dB.

Step 18 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports for the RMU9 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.

Step 19 Calculate the insertion loss for each add wavelength from the AMn port to the OUT port.
Calculate the pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port for the RMU9.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

NOTE

l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the
inside VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about the
insertion loss of the RMU9 board.

Step 20 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength for each output wavelength of the
OUT port for the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 21 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness for each wavelength
should be less than 2 dB.
Step 22 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the
U2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than
2 dB.
Step 23 For the optical power commissioning of the insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT
ports of the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of
OLA.

----End

5.13.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (RDU9+WSM9)


This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in the
ROADM station in the RDU9+WSM9 mode.

Prerequisites
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.
The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical
attenuator, VOA

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Testing Diagram (Networking with RDU9+WSM9)

Figure 5-34 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with RDU9+WSM9)

L L L L L L
Q O Q O S O
M G M G X G

Station E

D40V M40

TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM

DM AM
IN
West F IN IN EXPO RC F East
OAU1 RDU9 WSM9 OBU1
I I
EXPI
To D U TC OUT OUT OUT U To F

OUT
OUT EXPI TC
OUT
OBU1 WSM9 RDU9 OAU1
RC EXPO IN
IN
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT DCM IN
M40 D40V

L L L L L L
Q O S O S O
M G X G X G

Fix optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength
at the same time.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical
fiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.
Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.13.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TM ports on
the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.13.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of OLA.
Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the RM and OUT ports
on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TC ports on
the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 7 The commissioning method for the west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of
the OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power
of OLA.

Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end, from
the west FIU to the east FIU, and from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the
U2000.

Step 9 When wavelengths are dropped through the MR8V board or the D40V board, method 1 is
recommended to adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelengths during deployment
commissioning.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The MR8V board or the D40V board automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop
wavelength. This ensures that the average input power for the IN port of the west OTU at
the receive end meets requirements.
NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical
port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-
tune the optical power.
2. Method 2: In the scenario where the RDU9 is directly connected to the OTU, select
Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Manually adjust the
attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the drop wavelength of the RDU9 board.
This ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the west OTU at the receive
end meets the requirements.

Step 10 Test the optical power of the IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets
the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU.

Step 11 Adjust the optical power of the west pass-through wavelength. Method 1 is recommended during
deployment commissioning.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the west pass-through wavelength.
This ensures that the average input power of the pass-through wavelengths of the IN port
on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single
wavelength.
NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical
port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-
tune the optical power.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA corresponding to the pass-through
wavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through
wavelengths of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input
power of a single wavelength.

Step 12 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west RDU9 board by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.

Step 13 Test the input and output optical power of D40V, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the D40V board should be equal to or less than 8.0 dB.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn port and the pass-through loss
from the IN port to the EXPO port for the east RDU9.
NOTE

l For the insertion loss of the RDU9 board, refer to the Product Description.

Step 15 Adjust the output power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. Method 1 is recommended
during deployment commissioning.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU.
This ensures that the average input power for the add wavelengths of the IN port on the
east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical
port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-
tune the optical power.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the pass-through
wavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of the pass-
through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the
typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE

When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the D40V, a VOA (in the solid frame)
needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengths
through the M40, the VOA is not required.

Step 16 Test the input and output optical power of the M40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the M40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.

Step 17 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports for the WSM9 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.

Step 18 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn port to the OUT port. Calculate the
pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port of the WSM9.
NOTE

l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the
inside VOA of the board
l When the attenuation for the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss for the WSM9 board should be
equal to or less than 8 dB.

Step 19 Test the optical power of the IN port and the single wavelength for each output wavelength for
the OUT port of the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OBU1. The gain flatness of each wavelength
should be less than 2 dB.

Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal for the OBU1 by using the
U2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than
2 dB.

Step 22 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT ports
of the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

----End

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

5.13.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD4


+WSMD4)
This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in the
ROADM station in the WSMD4+WSMD4 mode.

Prerequisites
l The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.
l The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical
attenuator, VOA, U2000

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)


This section describes the commissioning procedure for the WSMD4 board. In this section, the
networking diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used for illustration purposes. The
network providing multi-dimensional grooming can be considered as multiple networks
providing two-dimensional grooming.

Figure 5-35 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)

Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM

IN TC RC OUT
DM4
OBU1 OAU1
F IN OUT IN AM4 OUT IN OUT F
West To D I WSMD4 WSMD4 I To F East
OUT
U RC AM4 TC U IN
IN
OBU1 DM4 OBU1
OUT IN OUT DM1 AM1 OUT IN
AM1 DM1
OBU

OBU

D40 M40 M40 D40

L L L L
O S O S
G X G X

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


VOA

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

NOTE

l In this diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports for the WSMD4 board are not shown.
The two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in other direction.
l The single-wavelength signals are transmitted directly to the AMn optical port by the OTU board.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection for each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical
fiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.13.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TM ports on
the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.13.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of OLA.

Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the RM and OUT ports
on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TC ports on
the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that for the
OLA station. For specific procedures, see Step 12 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of
OLA.

Step 8 Create a Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and create
one from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the U2000.

Step 9 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN ports for the west OTUs individually.
Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power for the west OTUs
meets the requirements.
NOTE

l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the
dashed frame need to be configured. If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical
amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not required.
l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD module
is configured on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not required.
Instead, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be configured.
l The previous commissioning method is for the OTU board with a PIN photodiode. For the OTU with
APD, a 10 dB fixed attenuator needs to be configured.
l There are two types of optical receive modules: PIN and APD. The specific module type can be
identified by the bar code information pasted on the front panel. The APD had a corresponding APD
warning identifier on the panel of the board.

Step 10 Test the optical power of the IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets
the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU.

Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN and DMn ports for the west WSMD4 with an optical power
meter. Test the output optical power for the D40.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn ports for the west WSMD4, and
calculate the insertion loss for the D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or less
than 6.5 dB.
NOTE

l For the WSMD4 board, Insertion Loss = Insertion Loss when the inside attenuation is zero +
Attenuation value of the internal VOA of the board.
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about the
insertion loss for the WSMD4 board.

Step 13 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths for the WSMD4.
Method 2 is recommended during deployment commissioning.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The WSMD4 automatically adjusts the optical power for the add wavelength of the east
OTU and the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of
pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal to
the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical
port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-
tune the power.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the WSMD4 board. This ensures
that the average input power of the IN port for the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal
to the typical input power of a single wavelength.

Step 14 Test the output optical power of the AMn and OUT ports for the east WSMD4 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.

Step 15 Calculate the add insertion loss and the pass-through loss from the AMn port to the OUT port
for the east WSMD4.

Step 16 Test the single wavelength optical power of the IN port and single wavelength optical power of
each output wavelength for the OUT port of the east OAU1 by using an optical spectrum
analyzer.

Step 17 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OAU1. The gain flatness for each wavelength
should be less than 2 dB.

Step 18 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal for the OAU1 by using the
U2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than
2 dB.

Step 19 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT ports
of the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

----End

5.13.12 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD2


+WSMD2)
This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in the
ROADM station in the WSMD2+WSMD2 mode.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Prerequisites
The fiber connections must be correct.
To make the OTU emit light normally, all channels must be accessed with services or must be
forced to emit light.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber adapter, Fiber, Signal analyzer (selected
according to the actual service type), such as SDH/SONET analyzer, Fixed optical attenuator,
Variable optical attenuator, U2000

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 5-36 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSMD2+WSMD2)


Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM

IN TC OUT EXPO OUT RC OUT


OAU1 OBU1
F IN IN EXPI IN OUT F
West To DI WSMD2 WSMD2 I To F East
U RC EXPI TC U
OUT OUT IN IN
OBU1 EXPO OAU1
OUT IN DM AM OUT IN
AM DM

D40 M40 M40 D40

L L L L
O S O S
G X G X

Procedure
Step 1 Check if the fiber connection between boards is correct based on the fiber connection diagram,
and check that the fiber on each board is well inserted. If not, immediately correct the error.
Step 2 Test the optical power of the west FIU and the SC2. See step 1 to step 9 in 5.13.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of OLA.
Step 3 Perform the commissioning on the west OAU. See step 10 to step 12 in5.13.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of OLA.
Step 4 Create optical cross-connections on a per-NE basis from the west FIU. Create optical cross-
connections on a per-NE basis from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the
U2000.
Step 5 Measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the IN port and the single-wavelength
output optical power at the DM and EXPO ports on the west WSMD2. Calculate the insertion
loss of the wavelength dropped from the IN port to the DM port and the insertion loss of the
wavelength that traverses from the IN port to the DM port on the WSMD2.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Drop insertion loss = Input optical power for a single drop wavelength at the IN port on the
WSMD2 – Output optical power for a single drop wavelength at the DM port on the WSMD2
Pass-through loss = Input optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the IN port on
the WSMD2 – Output optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the EXPO port on
the WSMD2

NOTE

For information about the parameters of optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description.

Step 6 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the IN port
and the single-wavelength output optical power at the Dn port on the west D40. Calculate the
insertion loss of the D40.
Single-wavelength insertion loss of the D40 = Single-wavelength input optical power at the IN
port on the D40 – Single-wavelength output optical power at the Dn port on the D40
Step 7 Test the input optical power from the IN port on all the west OTU boards. Replace or remove
the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power from the IN port on the OTU
boards is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload point – 5) dBm.
Step 8 Test the client-side transmitting optical power of the west OTU board. There are two possible
situations, described as follows:
l If the client equipment is also newly installed, connect the OTU boards to the client equipment
for test.
l If the client equipment is not connected, use a fiber to connect the client-side TX port on the
west OTU board to the client-side RX port on the east OTU board of station C by using a
fixed optical attenuator on the ODF.
NOTE

The client side of the OTU board is connected to the client equipment normally after commissioning. The
interconnection of the OTU boards exists for the testing of 24-hour bit errors in serial after an analyzer is
connected to station A after commissioning.

Step 9 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the input optical power of the east OBU. On the U2000, set
the attenuation of the VOA which corresponds to each wavelength on the east WSMD4. Set the
attenuation to ensure that the input optical power for each pass-through wavelength of the OBU
conforms to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE

The single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU permits a tolerance of ±1 dB. For the technical
specifications for the OBU board, see the Product Description.

Step 10 Measure the optical power at the RX port on the east OTU board. Add, replace or remove a fixed
optical attenuator to ensure that the optical power at this RX port is within the optimal range:
from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload – 5) dBm.
NOTE

Optical ports on the OTU board used in this network scenario are the S-64.2b ports. For client-side
specifications for other types of OTUs, see the Product Description.

Step 11 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the east OTU board. This value should be
in the range from 0 dBm to –5 dBm. This value is usually about –2 dBm.
Step 12 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the received single-wavelength optical power at the Mn
port and the single-wavelength output optical power at the OUT port on the east M40. Calculate
the insertion loss of the M40.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

NOTE

For the parameters for optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description.

Step 13 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the input optical power at the IN port on the east OBU. On
the U2000, set the attenuation of the VOA which corresponds to each wavelength on the east
WSMD2. Set the attenuation to ensure that the input optical power for each add wavelength of
the OBU conforms to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE

The single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU permits a tolerance of ±1 dB. For the technical
specifications of the OBU board, see Product Description.

Step 14 Measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the AM and EXPI ports and the single-
wavelength output optical power at the OUT port on the east WSMD2. Calculate the insertion
loss of the wavelength added from the AM port to the OUT port, and the insertion loss of the
wavelength that traverses from the AM port to OUT port on the WSMD2.

Add insertion loss = Input optical power of a single add wavelength at the AM port on the
WSMD2 – Output optical power of a single add wavelength at the OUT port on the WSMD2

Pass-through loss = Input optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the EXPI port
on the WSMD2 – Output optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the OUT port
on the WSMD2

NOTE

For the parameters for optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description. The insertion loss
measured in the previous steps includes the VOA attenuation, which differs from the insertion loss
measured when the VOA attenuation is set to 0.

Step 15 Perform the commissioning on the east OBU. See 5.13.2 Commissioning Transmit-End
Optical Power of the OTM Station.

Step 16 Perform the commissioning on the east FIU. See 5.13.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical
Power of the OTM Station.

----End

5.13.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9


+WSMD9)
This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in the
ROADM station in the WSMD9+WSMD9 mode.

Prerequisites
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.

To make the OTU emit light normally, all channels must be accessed with services or must be
forced to emit light.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber adapter, Fiber, Signal analyzer (selected
according to the actual service type), such as SDH/SONET analyzer, Fixed optical attenuator,
Variable optical attenuator, U2000

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSMD9+WSMD9)


This section describes the commissioning procedure based on the network in Figure 5-37. If the
system is required to support the 1588 clock, see 5.11.5 Commissioning Optical Power of
ROADM Board (WSMD4+WSMD4) for the commissioning procedure.

Figure 5-37 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSMD9+WSMD9)

O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

D40 M40
DCM DCM
DM1 AM1
LIN SOUT IN EXPO SIN LOUT
TM EXPI OUT TM
RX RX
DAS1 TX WSMD9 WSMD9 TX DAS1
RM RM
EXPO IN

SIN OUT EXPI SOUT LIN


LOUT
AM1 DM1
DCM DCM
M40 D40

O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

NOTE

l Optical ports AM2–AM8 and DM2–DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards
in other dimensions.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection for each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical
fiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 Test the optical power of the LIN port on the west DAS1 with an optical power meter. Compare
the value with optical power of the OUT port on the east FIU of station D to calculate the line
attenuation between station D and station E on the line side. If the actual line attenuation is larger
than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determine whether
the cable attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are faulty, clear the
fault by following the appropriate procedures.

Step 3 Test the input optical power of the LIN port and the output optical power of the TM port on the
west DAS1 at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values
in the commissioning record.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

Step 4 Calculate the insertion loss from the LIN port to the TM port of the west DAS1. The insertion
loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Step 5 Test the input optical power of the RX port on the DAS1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Add a proper attenuator to make the input optical power less than –3 dBm. Record the input
optical power of the RX port in the commissioning record.

Step 6 Test the output optical power of the TX port of the DAS1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Record the output optical power of the TX port in the commissioning record.

Step 7 Test the input optical power of the RM port and the output optical power of the LOUT port on
the east DAS1 at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting the fiber
to the SIN port of the DAS1 board). Record the optical power values in the commissioning
record.

Step 8 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the LOUT port on the east DAS1. The insertion
loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Step 9 Measure the optical power of each wavelength at the SOUT port on the DAS1 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer. Check whether the average output optical power of a single wavelength is
in the range of nominal optical power of a single wavelength ± 2 dB.

Step 10 Create a single-station optical cross-connection from the west DAS1 to the east DAS1, and create
one from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east DAS1 on the U2000.

Step 11 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN ports for the west OTUs individually.
Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power for the west OTUs
meets the requirements.

Step 12 Test the optical power of the IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets
the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU.

Step 13 Test the optical power of the IN and DMn ports for the west WSMD9 with an optical power
meter. Test the output optical power for the D40.

Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn ports for the west WSMD9, and
calculate the insertion loss for the D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or less
than 6.5 dB.
NOTE

l For the WSMD9 board, Insertion Loss = Insertion Loss when the inside attenuation is zero + Attenuation
value of the internal VOA of the board.
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about the
insertion loss for the WSMD9 board.

Step 15 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths for the WSMD9.
Method 2 is recommended during deployment commissioning.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The WSMD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the add wavelength of the east
OTU and the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of
pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal to
the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical
port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-
tune the power.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the WSMD9 board. This ensures
that the average input power of the IN port for the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal
to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
Step 16 Test the output optical power of the AMn and OUT ports for the east WSMD9 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 17 Calculate the add insertion loss and the pass-through loss from the AMn port to the OUT port
for the east WSMD9.
Step 18 Test the single wavelength optical power of the SIN port and single wavelength optical power
of each output wavelength for the LOUT port of the east DAS1 by using an optical spectrum
analyzer.
Step 19 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the DAS1. The gain flatness of each wavelength must
be lower than 2 dB.

----End

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to remotely commission optical power.

6.1 General Commissioning Sequence


This section describes the general sequence for commissioning optical power.
6.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power Commissioning
When remotely commissioning optical power of a board, measure the optical power for each
channel on the board by using an optical spectrum analyzing board. Then adjust the optical power
by changing the attenuation of VOAs built in the board and the gain of an optical amplifier board.
6.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain Network
This section uses project X as an example to illustrate the optical power commissioning
procedures.
6.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long Spans
This section describes how to commission a system with ultra-long spans.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

6.1 General Commissioning Sequence


This section describes the general sequence for commissioning optical power.

Basic Conditions for Remotely Commissioning Optical Power


l The EVOA configured on the main optical path must be an EVOA board (VA1 or VA4).
l MCA/OPM boards must be configured at optical power monitoring points so that you can
query and analyze the optical spectrum through the U2000.
l Optical fibers on the entire network are properly connected. The attenuation of the optical
fibers is normal and the communication between all NEs and the U2000 is normal.

General Sequence for Commissioning Optical Power


Optical power of NEs and boards is commissioned individually based on the optical signal flow.
During commissioning, ensure that the line attenuation is normal based on the optical power,
gain, and insertion loss requirements for each board.
Generally, the optical power of the OTU board, optical amplifier (OA), and the supervisory
channel board is commissioned based on the corresponding optical power requirements for the
boards.

Optical Power Commissioning Procedures


Figure 6-1 shows the commissioning procedure.
NOTE

If the line attenuation is greater than the End of Life (EOL) specified in the design drawing, check the internal
fiber connections and external fiber attenuators.
If the customer raises specific requirements on fiber margin and provides the measured value: the line attenuation
≤ EOL – required fiber margin.
If the customer provides only the EOL, it is required that the line attenuation only be smaller than the EOL.

Figure 6-1 General commissioning flow


Commission optical power of
add wavelengths

Commission links

Equilibrate optical power

Commission receive optical


power of OTUs

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Before commissioning the optical power, determine optical power monitoring sites and optical
power commissioning stations on the network according to Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2 Distribution of the stations for commissioning


Power adjusting Power Power adjusting Power Power adjusting Power
station (in add monitoring station monitoring station (in add monitoring
direction) station station direction) station

MCA\ MCA\ MCA\


OSA OSA OSA

OTM OLA OLA ROADM OLA FOADM OLA OTM


Line attenuation commissioning Line attenuation commissioning

Optical power equilibrium Optical power equilibrium

OSA: Optical Spectrum Analyzer MCA: Spectrum Analyzer Unit

NOTE

Consider the OTM, FOADM and ROADM stations as the optical power commissioning stations. As the optical
power for pass-through wavelengths on the FOADM stations cannot be commissioned for equalization purposes,
consider the FOADM stations as fibers during commissioning.
NOTE

If the optical power monitoring point is settled at the OTM or OADM station, the optical power of the OLA
stations does not need to be adjusted.
NOTE

To achieve optical power equilibrium, the network needs to be divided according to the network model, the start
and end stations should be specified, and the power-adjusting stations should be determined. When determining
what stations will have optical power adjustment monitoring, adhere to the following principles:
l If the number of spans between two power-adjusting stations is N, determine the power-monitoring station
in the middle of the span (N/2). If N is an odd number, the power-monitoring point should be shifted (N/
2±0.5). And configure MCA or OPM8 boards at the transmit and received ends as required.
NOTE

OPM8 boards are recommended.

The WDM system commissions the optical power for each NE individually based on the signal
flow in each network segment. One network segment has two signal flow directions, the transmit
direction and the receive direction.

First, complete the optical power commissioning of one OTM in the transmit direction. Then
individually commission the optical power for each downstream NE. Complete the optical power
commissioning of the destination OTM in the receive direction. Finally, complete the optical
power commissioning for the other signal flow in the reverse direction.

Project X is used as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning in the following
procedures:

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

6.1.1 Commissioning Procedure for the Chain Network


This section describes the commissioning procedure for the chain network.

Prerequisites
The fiber connection and Network configuration must be complete.

Network Diagram for the Chain Network


Figure 6-3 shows the commissioning procedure for the chain network.

Figure 6-3 Commissioning procedure for the chain network


13 12 11 10 9 8

West MCA MCA MCA East

OTM OLA ROADM OLA FOADM OLA OTM

A B C D E F G

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

: OTM : OLA : OADM

Commissioning Requirements
First, commission the optical power in the transmit direction of OTM station A. Then
commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow until the optical power
commissioning is complete in the west-to-east direction. For the commissioning sequence, see
Figure 6-3 (steps 1 through 7). Then commission the optical power in the reverse direction, that
is, in the east-to-west direction. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-3 (steps 7 through
13).

Commission the optical power along the A-B-C-D-E-F-G signal flow in the following sequence.

NOTE

For the technical specifications for each amplifier board and the OTU board, see Quick Reference Table of the
Units in the Hardware Description.

Commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and then commission the links:
l At station A, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths to ensure that the input
optical power for the OA at the transmit end is consistent with the nominal input optical
power for the OA.
l At station B, commission the B-from-A optical power to ensure that the input optical power
for the OA is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

l At station C, commission the C-from-B optical power to ensure that the input optical power
for the OA at the receive end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.
l At station C, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and the pass-through
wavelengths to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the transmit end is
consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.
l At station D, commission the D-from-C optical power to ensure that the input optical power
for the OA is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.
l At station E, commission the E-from-D optical power to ensure that the input optical power
for the OA at the receive end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.
l At station E, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and the pass-through
wavelengths to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the transmit end is
consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.
l At station F, commission the F-from-E optical power to ensure that the input optical power
for the OA is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.
l At station G, commission the G-from-F optical power to ensure that the input optical power
for the OA at the receive end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.

Equilibrate the optical power:


l If the MCA board is configured at station B, commission the optical power for the add
wavelengths at station A for the equilibrium based on the optical power tested by the MCA
board at station B. This ensures that:
Single-wavelength output optical power = (Nominal single-wavelength output power ± 1)
dBm
l If the MCA board is configured at station D, commission the optical power for the add
wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths at station C for the equilibrium based on the
optical power tested by the MCA board at station D. This ensures that:
Single-wavelength output optical power = (Nominal single-wavelength output power ± 1)
dBm
l If the MCA board is configured at station F, commission the optical power for the add
wavelengths at station E for the equilibrium based on the optical power tested by the MCA
board at station F. This ensures that:
Single-wavelength output optical power = (Nominal single-wavelength output power ± 1)
dBm

Commission the receive optical power of the OTUs:


l Commission the receive optical power of the OTUs to be in the nominal range of the receive
optical power along the A-C-E-G span.

6.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring Network


This section describes the commissioning procedure for the ring network.

Prerequisites
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.

Network Diagram for the Ring Network


Figure 6-4 shows the commissioning procedure for the ring network.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Figure 6-4 Commissioning procedure for the ring network

19 18 17

11

9 10

1 2 3

A MCA C

12 8 MCA H D MCA 4 16

G MCA E

7 6 5

13 14 15

: OLA : OADM

NOTE

When the commissioning of 1–10 is complete, check the spectrum analysis results on the power-monitoring
sites in the B-D-F-H sequence. If the output optical power of each single wavelength meets the equilibrium
requirement, that is, the measured output optical power is the nominal output optical power of a single wavelength
plus or minus 1.0 dB, perform the commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction, that is, steps 11 through 19.
If the optical power of any board fails to meet the equilibrium requirement, re-commission the optical power in
a clockwise direction, that is, steps 1 through 10. Do not proceed with the commissioning in a counter-clockwise
direction until the optical power for every board meets equilibrium requirements.

Commissioning Requirements
Before commissioning a ring network, select the start station and end station according to the
following principle:
l The start station or end station should be a station which adds or drops wavelengths.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

First, commission the optical power in the transmit direction of ROADM station A. Commission
the optical power station by station along the signal flow indicated by arrows in the figure. For
the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-4 (steps 1 through 10). Then commission the optical
power in the reverse direction station by station. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure
6-4 (steps 11 through 19).
For details on the commissioning, see the corresponding commissioning procedures on the chain
network.

6.1.3 Commissioning Procedure for the Mesh Network


This section describes the commissioning procedure for the mesh network.

Prerequisites
The fiber connection and Network configuration must be complete.

Network Diagram for the Mesh Network


Figure 6-5 shows the commissioning procedure for the mesh network.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Figure 6-5 Commissioning procedure for the mesh network

19 18 17

11

9 10

1 2 3

30 32

A MCA C

20 29 B
K

MCA
28
J
31 21
MCA H D MCA
12 8 4 16
27
I 26
22
MCA

F 23

G E

MCA

25 24

7 6 5

13 14 15

: OLA : OADM

NOTE

When the commissioning of steps 1 through 10 is complete, check the spectrum analysis results on the power-
monitoring sites in the B-D-F-H sequence. If the output optical power for each single wavelength meets the
equilibrium requirements, that is, the measured output optical power is the nominal output optical power of a
single wavelength plus or minus 1.0 dB, perform the commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction, that is,
steps 11 through 19. If the optical power for any board fails to meet the equilibrium requirements, re-commission
the optical power in a clockwise direction, that is, steps 1 through 10. Do not proceed with the commissioning
in a counter-clockwise direction until the optical power for every board meets equilibrium requirements.

Commissioning Requirements
Before commissioning the mesh network, divide the mesh network into chain subnets and ring
subnets. Then commission the subnets. Divide the mesh network according to the following
principles:

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

l Divide the mesh network into ring and chain subnets according to the wavelength
connection. The ring subnets should carry the most wavelength connections, and the chain
subnets should carry the least wavelength connections. Determine the ring subnets first and
then the chain subnets.
l Divide the mesh networks into large-scale ring subnets and small-scale chain subnets when
possible.
l When dividing the mesh network is complete, select the start and end stations for each ring
subnet. For other principles, see the corresponding commissioning requirements on the ring
network.

Divide the mesh network shown in Figure 6-5 as follows:


l Ring subnet: A-B-C-D-E-F-G-H-A
Commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow indicated by the
arrows in Figure 6-5 (steps 1 through 10). Then, commission the optical power in the
reverse direction station by station. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps
11 through 19).
l Chain subnet: A-K-J-I-E
Commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow. For the
commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 20 through 24). When commissioning the
optical power for the chain network is complete, the optical power at station E changes.
Therefore, you need to measure and analyze the optical power between the adjacent D and
F stations. In addition, you need to re-commission the optical power at station E for
equilibrium purposes. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 24 through
26). Then commission the optical power in the reverse direction along the signal flow. For
the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 27 through 30). Measure and analyze
the optical power between station H and station B. At station A, commission the optical
power for equilibrium purposes. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps
30 through 32).

For details on the commissioning, see the corresponding commissioning procedures on the chain
network.

6.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power


Commissioning
When remotely commissioning optical power of a board, measure the optical power for each
channel on the board by using an optical spectrum analyzing board. Then adjust the optical power
by changing the attenuation of VOAs built in the board and the gain of an optical amplifier board.

6.2.1 Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards


This section describes how to set the gain and Rated Optical Power for an optical amplifier
(OA) board.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NM operator authority or higher.

The board must be created.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Impact on System
None

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
l OAU and OBU are OA boards that support gain adjustment. In practical use, calculate the
gain range that can be set based on the intermediate insertion loss.
NOTE

Adjust the gain of the OBU board only when the ALC function is used.
l Before enabling the OPA function, set the value in the Rated Optical Power field of the
OA board at the transmit end as the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength.

Procedure
1. On the U2000, set the gain for an OA board.
a. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of the NE is displayed.
b. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
c. Select the desired OA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
d. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
e. On the Basic Attributes tab page, double-click Nominal Gain field, and enter an
appropriate value.
f. Click Apply.
2. On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power for an OA board.
a. Select the desired OA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
b. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
c. On the Advanced Attributes tab page, set the value in the Rated Optical Power field
as the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength.
NOTE

For the technical specifications for each type of the OA boards, see Quick Reference Table of the
Units in the Hardware Description.
d. Click Apply.
3. On the U2000, close the laser at the OUT port on the OA board.
a. Select the desired OA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
b. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
c. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Laser Status to Off.
d. Click Apply.
4. On the U2000, enable the laser at the OUT port on the OA board.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

a. Select the desired OA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
b. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
c. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Laser Status to On.
d. Click Apply.

6.2.2 Adjusting Internal Attenuators on Boards


When a board has an internal attenuator, you can adjust the optical power of this board by
changing the attenuation of the internal attenuator. This section describes how to adjust the
attenuation based on engineering design documents.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NM operator authority or higher.

The board must be created.

Impact on System
None

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Background Information
The electrical variable attenuator boards are the VA1, VA4, M40V, MR8V, ROAM, RMU9,
WSM9, WSD9, WSMD4, WSMD9 and WSMD2 boards.
NOTE

l The variable attenuator built in the WSM9 or WSD9 board can be adjusted only when the board has been
configured with routes.
l The variable attenuator built in the AMx port of the WSMD2 or WSMD4 board can be adjusted only when
the board has been configured with routes.

Procedure
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of
the NE is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand
Function Tree.
4. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
5. On the Basic Attributes tab page, double-click the Optical Interface Attenuation
Ratio field, and then enter an appropriate value.
NOTE

The adjustable range of the built-in attenuator for a board depends on the board type.
6. Click Apply.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

6.2.3 Configuring the MCA Board


This section describes how to set the parameters for an MCA board so that it monitors the optical
power for the specified channels.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NM operator authority or higher.
The board must be created.

Impact on System
None

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Background Information
The MCA boards include the MCA4 ,MCA8 and OPM8 boards.

Procedure
1. Set parameters for an MCA board to monitor the optical power of wavelengths.
a. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of the NE is displayed.
b. Right-click an NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
c. Select the desired MCA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
d. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Monitor Wavelength from the drop-
down list.
e. Click Query.
f. Set Wavelength Monitor Status of the specified wavelength to Monitor or No
Monitor as required.
g. Click Apply.
2. Query the optical power and OSNR of the wavelengths on the specified channels by using
an MCA board.
a. Select the desired MCA board, and then choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum
Analysis from the Function Tree.
b. Select the number for the desired channel from Port Number, and click Query.

6.2.4 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line Boards
This section describes how to set the board relay mode for the Line boards.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NM operator authority or higher.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

The board must be created.

Impact on System
None

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Background Information
The board works either in Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When the optical-
layer ASON is applied, however, the board must work in Optical Relay Mode. When there is
no optical-layer ASON applied, the board can work in either electrical relay mode or optical
relay mode. But, it is recommended that the board be configured to work in electrical relay mode.
NOTE

For the line boards that support the regeneration mode, see the Hardware Description.

Procedure
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of
the NE is displayed.
2. Right-click and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired line board, and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
4. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Board from the drop-down list.
5. Set Board Mode to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.
NOTE

The board mode can be set to either Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer
ASON is applied, however, the board mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode. When there is no optical-
layer ASON applied, the board can work in either electrical relay mode or optical relay mode. But, it is
recommended that the board be configured to work in electrical relay mode.
6. Click Apply.

6.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the


Chain Network
This section uses project X as an example to illustrate the optical power commissioning
procedures.

6.3.1 Example Description


This section describes the networking for project X.
Figure 6-6 shows the networking diagram of project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E, F and G are
the WDM systems which form the chain network. Among these ONEs, the ONE A and ONE G
are the OTM stations, the ONE B, ONE D and ONE F are the OLA stations, the ONE C is the
ROADM station and the ONE E is the FOADM station.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Networking Diagram of the Project X


Figure 6-6 shows the networking diagram of project X.

Figure 6-6 Networking diagram of project X


13 12 11 10 9 8

West MCA MCA MCA East

OTM OLA ROADM OLA FOADM OLA OTM

A B C D E F G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

:OTM :OLA : OADM

In this commissioning example, the signal flow from west to east is used as an example to
illustrate the commissioning procedure. The commissioning method for the signal flow from
east to west is the same as the signal flow from west to east.
Figure 6-7 shows the commissioning procedure.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Figure 6-7 General commissioning flow of project X

OPA function is
OTM\FOADM
available in the ROADM?
No Yes

Commission optical power of add Commission optical power of add


wavelengths wavelengths

Force one OTU to emit light


Set "Rated Optical Power" to
and close WDM-side lasers of
typical input optical power of a
other OTUs
single wavelength for the OA

Preset VOA or VA1 of add


wavelengths of multiplexer board
as 5 dB In the station, set
the "OPA Mode" to "Auto"

Adjust VOA or VA1 before


OA or gain of OA so that the
output optical power reaches the In the station, set
nominal optical power the "OPA Mode" to "Manual"

Commission links

Preset VOA or VA1 of links

Adjust the gain of the line


amplifier to compensate the line
attenuation

Equilibrate optical power

Make sure that the overall


optical power of the multiplexed
wavelength is constant and
adjust VOA or VA1 of each add
wavelength for power equilibrium
of each wavelength

Commission receive optical


power of OTUs

Measure the receive optical


power of each OTU and adjust
VOA or VA1 of the channel so
that the receive optical power of
the OTU meets requirements

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Requirements on Incident Optical Power


Table 6-1 shows the incident optical power requirements based on a 10Gbit/s single-wavelength
system.

Table 6-1 Requirements on Incident Optical Power

Module Type Number of G.652 SSMF G.655 LEAF G.653


Wavelengths

NRZ/(D)RZ 40 +4 +4 -5

80 +1 +1 -7

The optical power listed in the table is expressed in dBm.

NOTE

For other optical modules or fiber types, contact the product managers or network design personnel to determine
the incident optical power.
NOTE

The dispersion of G.653 fiber is close to zero, which causes strong non-linear effects. Therefore, the incident
power is relatively low. Hence, in the WDM system based on the G.653 fiber, a variable optical attenuator
(VOA) must be added at the output end of the transmit optical amplifier board. This ensures the per-channel
incident optical power meets the requirement of the G.653 fiber.

OAU

FIU

OAU

: VOA

6.3.2 Commissioning Procedure


This section describes the procedure for commissioning optical power.

Commissioning Procedure for the Add-Wavelength and Link Optical Power


Table 6-2 lists the procedure for each site.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Table 6-2 Commissioning procedures


Proced From West to East
ure
1 2 (OLA) 3 4 (OLA) 5 6 (OLA) 7
(OTM) (ROAD (FOAD (OTM)
M) M)

Commis Y N Y N Y N N
sioning
Optical
Power
for the
Add
Wavelen
gths

Commis N Y Y Y Y Y Y
sion
links

NOTE

l “Y” indicates that the commissioning procedure should be performed.


l “N” indicates that the procedure need not be performed.
NOTE

The optical power for single channel is not optimized at this step, but during equalization.
NOTE

Before starting, set the attenuation of DEMUX to maximum, if EVOA is available.

The commissioning flowchart for the optical power of the OTM/OADM is shown in Figure
6-8.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Figure 6-8 Commissioning procedure for OTM/OADM optical power


Start

N Configure the E2E OCH trail


OPA is
of ROADM node if ROADM is
available?
there

Y
Block all wavelengths except
one local added wavelength
Configure the E2E OCH trail

Set OA Gain to minimum


Set reference OA power by if variable Gain OA
NMS

Adjust input power of local


Enable OPA of ROADM node wavelength to target power
(OPA set attenuation of
EVOA to calculated value)
Release all the blocked
traffic which is going to
Set OPA to manual downstream

End

The commissioning flowchart for the optical power of an OLA is shown in Figure 6-9.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Figure 6-9 Commissioning procedure for OLA optical power


Start

Calculate and set the target Y


attenuation according to the Design loss <
design span loss minimum Gain OA?

Set EVOA at the receive end


to Minimum

Span loss is less than


N
design data? Check fiber

Span loss is more than N Set VOA make


minimum gain of OA? Span loss=Min gain

Set OA Gain=Span loss

End

Commissioning Procedure for Optical Power Equalization


Table 6-3 lists the procedures for each site.

Table 6-3 Commissioning procedures


Proced From West to East
ure
1 2 (OLA) 3 4 (OLA) 5 6 (OLA) 7
(OTM) (ROAD (FOAD (OTM)
M) M)

Equalize Y Ya Y Ya Yb Ya N
optical
power

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

NOTE

l “Y” indicates that the commissioning procedure should be performed.


l “N” indicates that the procedure need not be performed.
l “a” indicates that the OLA station works as a monitoring station during the commissioning process of
commissioning the optical power for equilibrium purposes.
l “b” indicates that the optical power for each add channel at the FOADM station is commissioned for
equalization purposes.

The commissioning flowchart for equalizing wavelength optical power is shown in Figure
6-10.

Figure 6-10 Commissioning procedure for equalizing wavelength optical power


Start

Query the power level of


each channel at monitor site

Compare to the reference


level and get target
attenuation set

Set EVOA by NMS

N
Is flatness in range of
target?

N
Is the last OEQ in
equalization order?

End

Commissioning Procedure for Drop-Wavelength Optical Power


Table 6-4 lists the procedures for each site.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Table 6-4 Commissioning procedures


Proced From West to East
ure
1 2 (OLA) 3 4 (OLA) 5 6 (OLA) 7
(OTM) (ROAD (FOAD (OTM)
M) M)

Commis Y N Y N Y N Y
sion
receive
optical
power of
OTUs

NOTE

l “Y” indicates that the commissioning procedure should be performed.


l “N” indicates that the procedure need not be performed.

The commissioning flowchart for drop wavelength optical power is shown in Figure 6-11.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Figure 6-11 Commissioning procedure for drop wavelength optical power

Start

N
Is EVOA available?

Y
Set default attenuation by
NMS

Query input Power of OTU by


NMS

Y Is it in recommended
range?

Go to the site to change the


N fixed attenuator or adjust
Is EVOA available? attenuation of MVOA until the
power is inside the
recommended range
Y
Adjust the EVOA until the
power is inside the
recommended range

End

6.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at


OTM Station A
This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station A that is in the
west-to-east signal flow.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Prerequisite
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.

The ECC communication must be created.

The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete.

The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Background Information
For the technical specifications of each type of the boards, see Quick Reference Table of the
Units in the Hardware Description.

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-12 Fiber connections of OTM station A

Station A
Rx M31
OTU
M32
M OUT OUT
OTU
4 OAU1
0 To B
IN RC OUT
M40
V
OTU

TM RM F
SC1 I
RM TM
U
Tx D31
OTU
D32
OTU D
4 OAU1 From B
0
IN OUT TC IN
D40 DCM
OTU RDC TDC

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


EVOA

NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-12, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, you must configure the MVOA
and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.

Procedure
Step 1 Set Laser Shutdown to Disabled.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE


Function from the Main Topology.

2. Click from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane to update the Navigator Tree.
Select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow button.
3. In the row of Laser Shutdown under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Disabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light and close WDM-side lasers for the
other OTUs.
NOTE

After the OTU board is installed in the subrack, the WDM-side laser of the OTU is automatically enabled and
is forced to emit light.
1. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE A is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-
hand Function Tree.
4. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to Off. Click Apply.

----End

Scenario 1: An EVOA Is Installed Before the Optical Amplifier Board


Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel to 5 dB.
NOTE

The EVOA attenuation set at this point is the preset value. It is used to adjust the optical power of each wavelength
during commissioning of the optical power equilibrium.
1. Select the desired M40V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
left-hand Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to 5dB.
3. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed telling you that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
Step 2 On the U2000, set the gain of the OAU1 to the minimum nominal gain.
1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
left-hand Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Nominal Gain to 20.0dB.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE

The OAU101 is used as an example of the OAU1. The minimum nominal gain is 20 dB, and the nominal single-
wavelength input optical power is –16 dB (40 channels). For the technical specifications of the amplifier, see
Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.

Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OAU1 in the transmit direction.
1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > Optical Power
Management from the left-hand Function Tree.
2. Click Query to query the Input Power of the OAU1.
3. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the VA1 board (EVOA) so that the actual input optical power of the
OAU1 reaches about -16 dBm, based on the Input Power of the OAU1 queried by using the
U2000.
1. Select the desired VA1 board (EVOA), and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the left-hand Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to the desired
value.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE

If the input optical power of the OAU cannot meet the requirements after adjusting the attenuation of the
VA1, you can adjust the gain of the OAU to ensure that the output optical power meets requirements.
NOTE

In the Basic Attributes tab, Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Lower Threshold
(dB) indicate the adjustable range of the gain of the OAU1.

Step 5 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers for the other OTUs.


1. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-
hand Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to On.
3. Click Apply.

Step 6 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled.


1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE
Function from the Main Topology.

2. Click from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane to update the Navigator Tree.
Select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow button.
3. In the Laser Shutdown row under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Enabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.

----End

Scenario 2: No EVOA Is Installed Before the Optical Amplifier Board


Step 1 On the U2000, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel
to 10 dB.

Step 2 Set the gain of the OAU1 to the minimum nominal gain.

Step 3 Query the input optical power of the OAU1 in the transmit direction.

Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at the add wavelength channel so that the
input optical power of the OAU1 reaches the nominal input optical power, based on the input
optical power of the OAU1 queried by using the U2000.

Step 5 Shut down the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the OTU
that accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform the commissioning based on Step 1 through
Step 4.

Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths based on the preceding steps.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Step 7 Step 7 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the other OTUs.


1. Select the desired OTU boards, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
left-hand Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to On. Click Apply.
Step 8 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled.
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE
Function from the Main Topology.

2. Click from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane to update the Navigator Tree.
Then select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow
button.
3. In the Laser Shutdown row under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Enabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.

----End

6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B


This section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station B that is in the west-
to-east signal flow.

Prerequisite
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.
The ECC communication must be created.
The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete.
The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Background Information
For the technical specifications for each type of the board, see Quick Reference Table of the
Units in the Hardware Description.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-13 Fiber connections of OLA station B (OAU1)

Station B

DCM
TDC RDC
TC OUT
RC
IN
OAU1
IN OUT

F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM U
West East
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1

OUT RDC TDC IN


DCM

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


EVOA

Figure 6-14 Fiber connections of OLA station B (OBU1+OBU1)

Station B

TC IN OUT D IN OUT RC
OBU1 C OBU1
IN M OUT

F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
West East
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1

OUT RDC TDC IN


DCM

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


EVOA

NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-13 and Figure 6-14, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1
or VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure the MVOA and
then perform the optical power commissioning on site.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

NOTE

The preset values for the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input optical
power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference
Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.

Scenario 1: Commissioning for the OLA (OAU1) Networking


Step 1 Calculate the link attenuation for this span of optical transmission line based on the engineering
design documents provided by the client.

Step 2 You should preset the attenuation of the VA1 located before the amplifier by using the following
formula: Attenuation of the VA1 = Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the upstream
station - link attenuation - Nominal input optical power of the amplifier at the OLA station.
NOTE

If the calculated preset value is a negative number, preset the attenuation of the VA1 to the minimum attenuation.
NOTE

For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in "Commissioning the Optical Power
of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 3 Query the output optical power (Pout) of the OA at the upstream station A and input optical
power (Pin) of the OA at the downstream station B. Calculate the attenuation between the two
amplifiers according to the following formula: Attenuation between the two amplifiers = Pout
– Pin.
NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Querying the optical power of the OA in "Commissioning the Optical Power
of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 4 If the actual attenuation between amplifiers is smaller than the attenuation specified in the
engineering design document, increase the attenuation of the VA1 so that the input optical power
reaches the minimum nominal input optical power. If the actual attenuation between amplifiers
is greater than the attenuation specified in the engineering design document, decrease the
attenuation of the VA1 so that the input optical power of the amplifier reaches the nominal input
optical power.
NOTE

For the technical specifications of each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the
Hardware Description.

Step 5 See Step 3, and calculate the attenuation between amplifiers after adjustment.

Step 6 Set the gain of the amplifier according to the following formula: Gain of the amplifier = Nominal
output optical power of the amplifier at the station - Nominal output optical power of the
amplifier at the upstream station + Attenuation between amplifiers.
1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
left-hand Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Nominal Gain according to the following formula:
Gain of the amplifier = Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the station -
Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the upstream station + Attenuation
between amplifiers.
3. Click Apply.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Step 7 Optional: If the calculated gain exceeds the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU, the
output optical power of the OA cannot reach the nominal output optical power. Therefore, set
the gain to the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU.
NOTE

Maximum gain that can be set = Maximum gain of the OA - Intermediate insertion loss. Intermediate insertion
loss = Output optical power of the PAOUT optical port - Input optical power of the BAIN optical port.
1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
left-hand Function Tree.
2. In the Basic Attributes tab, click Query. Check Nominal Gain Upper Threshold and
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold to obtain the tunable range of the gain for the OAU1.
3. Choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the left-hand Function Tree.
4. Click Query. Query and record the value of Output Power of PAOUT and the value of
Input Power of BAIN, and calculate the insertion loss.
5. Calculate the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU1 based on the insertion loss.
6. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree.
7. In the Basic Attributes tab, set Nominal Gain to the maximum gain that can be set.
8. Click Apply.

----End

Scenario 2: Commissioning for the OLA (OBU1+OBU1) Networking


Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the VA1 located before the OBU1 at the input end to the minimum
value (1 dB). For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in
"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A". Commission
the two OBU1 amplifiers as one amplifier. Query the output optical power of the amplifier at
the transmit end of the upstream station (Pout) and the input optical power of the OBU1 amplifier
at the receive end of the station (Pin). Calculate the line attenuation according to the following
formula: Line attenuation = Pout – Pin. For the operations on the U2000, see Querying the
Optical Power of the OA in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at
OTM Station A".
NOTE

If the input optical power is within the input range of the optical power amplifier, you do not need to adjust the
optical power of the VA1. Otherwise, you should adjust the attenuation of the VA1 to make sure that the input
optical power meets the requirements for the input optical power of the optical power amplifier.

Step 2 Adjust the optical power of the VA1 between the two OBU1 amplifiers based on the line
attenuation, making the following formula valid. Output optical power of the OBU1 at the
receive end - input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end = fixed gain of the OBU1 +
fixed gain of the OBU1 - line attenuation.
NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in "Commissioning the Optical Power
of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

----End

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

6.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths


and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C that is in the
west-to-east signal flow.

Prerequisite
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.
The ECC communication must be created.
The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete.
The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Background Information
For the technical specifications for each type of the board, see Quick Reference Table of the
Units in the Hardware Description.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-15 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSD9+RMU9)

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

M40V
Station C D40
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM

OBU1
IN OUT

DM TOA
F AM F
I EXPO ROA I
OBU1 WSD9 RMU9 OBU1
U TC IN EXPI OUT IN U To F East
West To D OUT IN OUT RC

RC OUT EXPI IN
OUT
OBU1 RMU9 WSD9 OAU1
OUT IN ROA EXPO IN
TOA TC
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT IN
DCM
OBU1

M40V D40

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


EVOA

NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-15, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, you must configure the MVOA, then
perform the optical power commissioning on site.
NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-15, if the 80-wavelength system is used, it is recommended to add the VA1 in the dashed
frame.
NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at
the same time.
NOTE

The preset values for the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength input
optical power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick
Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.

Procedure
Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA at each drop channel of the WSD9 on the receiving side of
the ROADM station to the maximum value.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE C in the Main Topology. The Running Status of
NE C is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired WSD9 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
4. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to the
maximum value (15.0).
5. Click Apply.

----End

Scenario 1: Wavelengths Are Directly Added from OTU to the RMU9 (OPA)
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end WSD9 are used for
compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4
Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power of a single wavelength for the OBU1 at the transmit
end based on the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies with system
(40-channel system or 80-channel system).
1. Select the desired OBU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Then set Rated Optical Power to -19.0. The OBU103
(40 channels) is used as an example here.
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 Optional: If the OA at the transmit end is an OAU, set Rated Optical Power of the OAU1 at
the transmit end based on the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies
with system (40-channel system or 80-channel system). For more information, see Quick
Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see step Step 2 .

Step 4 Set OPA Mode to Auto.


1. In the NE Explorer window. Choose the NE C, and choose Configuration > Optical
Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab. Right-click OPA Mode and
choose Auto for the desired optical cross-connections.
3. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

Scenario 2: Wavelengths Are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (OPA)
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end WSD9 are used for
compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4
Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power of a single wavelength for the OBU1 at the transmit
end according to the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies with
system (40-channel system or 80-channel system).

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

NOTE

Rated Optical Power should be set for the OBU1 behind the M40V and the OBU1 behind the RMU9. The
recommended OBU to use behind the M40V is the OBU104.
NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see step Step 2 .

Step 3 Optional: If the OA at the transmit end is an OAU, set Rated Optical Power of the OAU1 at
the transmit end according to the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which
varies with system (40-channel system or 80-channel system). See Quick Reference Table of
the Units in the Hardware Description.
NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see step Step 2 .

Step 4 Set OPA Mode to Auto.


NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see step Step 4 .

----End

Scenario 3: Wavelengths Are Directly Added from OTU to the RMU9 (Manual
Power Adjustment)
Step 1 Set Laser Shutdown to Disabled.
NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in "Commissioning the Optical
Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and shut down the WDM-side lasers
for all the other OTUs.
NOTE

Deactivate the optical cross-connections on WSD9 to block the pass-through wavelengths.


Activate the optical cross-connections after adjusting the add wavelengths.
For details, see the Configuration Guide.
NOTE

For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of
the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end.
1. Select the desired OBU1, and choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Click Query to query the current input optical power of the OBU1.
3. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel of the RMU9 so that the
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end is the same as the nominal
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers and
the type of system should be considered.)

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

NOTE

For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the
Hardware Description.
1. Select the desired RMU9. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function
Tree.
2. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set the Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio of the
desired channel to the desired value.
3. Click Apply.
Step 5 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the OTU that
accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform commissioning based on steps Step 3 through
Step 4.
Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the preceding
steps.
Step 7 Disable the lasers on all the OTU boards with add wavelengths at the station. In the pass-through
direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the line optical power
attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power
at OLA Station B.
Step 8 Optional: If the EXPO port of the WSD9 is connected to the EXPI port of the RMU9, preset
the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each of pass-through wavelengths channel to 7
dB.
1. Select the desired WSD9 board. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for each
wavelength in the pass-through direction to 7.0.
3. Click Apply.
Step 9 Optional: If the DM port for the WSD9 is connected to the AM port of the RMU9, preset the
attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. In
addition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the RMU9 at each pass-through wavelength
channel to the minimal attenuation value.
Step 10 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the Laser of the OTU in
"Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths at OTM station A".
Step 11 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in
"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

----End

Scenario 4: Wavelengths are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (Manual Power
Adjustment and the VA1 Appears in the Dashed Frame)
Step 1 Set Laser Shutdown to Disabled.
NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in "Commissioning the Optical
Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and shut down the WDM-side lasers
for all the other OTUs.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the
Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 3 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel to 5 dB.
1. Select the desired M40V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Attenuation(dB) for each wavelength in the add
wavelength direction to 5.0.
3. Click Apply.
Step 4 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V. For details, see
step Step 3.
Step 5 Adjust the attenuation of the VA1 after the M40V so that the single-wavelength input optical
power of the OBU1 behind the M40V is the same as the nominal single-wavelength input optical
power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers and the type of system should be
considered.)
NOTE

For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the
Hardware Description.

Step 6 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end. For details, see
Step 3.
Step 7 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the RMU9 so that the
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the RMU9 is the same as the nominal
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1.
NOTE

For the technical specifications of each type of the amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in
the Hardware Description.

Step 8 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the OTU that
accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform commissioning based on steps Step 3 through
Step 4.
Step 9 Adjust the optical power of all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the preceding
steps.
Step 10 Disable the WDM-side lasers for all OTUs on the add channels.
Step 11 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the
line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the
Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
Step 12 Optional: If the EXPO port of the WSD9 is connected to the EXPI port of the RMU9, preset
the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 7 dB.
Step 13 Optional: If the DM port of the WSD9 is connected to the AM port for the RMU9, preset the
attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. In
addition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the RMU9 at each pass-through wavelength
channel to the minimal attenuation value.
Step 14 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs again. For details, see Setting the Laser of the
OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Step 15 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in
"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

----End

Scenario 5: Wavelengths Are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (Manual Power
Adjustment and the VA1 Does not Appear in the Dashed Frame)
Step 1 Set Laser Shutdown to Disabled.
NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in "Commissioning the Optical
Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser of only one OTU to emit light, and shut down WDM-side lasers for
all the other OTUs.
NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the
Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V. For details, see
step Step 3.

Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the M40V so that the
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V is the same as the nominal
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers and
the type of system should be considered.)
NOTE

For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the
Hardware Description.

Step 5 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for each of the other wavelength add channels for the
M40V to the attenuation value of the EVOA in the wavelength add channel mentioned in step
Step 4.

Step 6 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end. For details, see
step Step 3.

Step 7 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the RMU9 so that the
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the RMU9 is the same as the nominal
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1.
NOTE

For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the
Hardware Description.

Step 8 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU and enable the WDM-side laser on only the OTU that
accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform commissioning based on steps Step 3 through
Step 4.

Step 9 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the preceding
steps.

Step 10 Disable the WDM-side lasers for all OTUs on the add channels.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Step 11 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the
line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the
Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
Step 12 Optional: If the EXPO port of the WSD9 is connected to the EXPI port of the RMU9, preset
the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 7 dB.
Step 13 Optional: If the DM port of the WSD9 is connected to the AM port of the RMU9, preset the
attenuation of the EVOA of the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. In
addition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the RMU9 at each pass-through wavelength
channel to the minimal attenuation value.
Step 14 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the laser of the OTU in
"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 15 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled. For details, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE
Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

----End

6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths


and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (WSD9
+WSM9) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.

Prerequisite
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.
The ECC communication must be created.
The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete.
The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Background Information
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units
in the Hardware Description.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-16 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSD9+WSM9)

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

Station C

D40 M40V

TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM

DM AM
F EXPO F
OAU1 WSD9 WSM9 OBU1
I I
West To D U
TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT IN OUT RC U To F East

EXPI OUT
OBU1 WSM9 WSD9 OAU1
EXPO IN
RC OUT IN OUT TC
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT IN
M40V D40
DCM

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


EVOA

NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-16, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, you must first configure the MVOA and
then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at
the same time.
NOTE

The preset values in the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength input
optical power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick
Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.

Procedure
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the optical amplifier before the WSD9 at the receive end is used
to compensate the line optical attenuation. Commission the optical power for the pass-through
channel based on the procedure for 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA
Station B.

Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power for the OBU1 at the transmit end based on the nominal
input optical power for a single wavelength, which varies with the system (40-channel system
or 80-channel system).

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

NOTE

For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the
Hardware Description.
NOTE

For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the rated optical power of the OA in "Commissioning the optical
power of the add wavelengths and link at ROADM station C".

Step 3 Set OPA Mode to Auto.


NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Setting the OPA function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add
Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C".

Step 4 According to the analysis result of the optical power spectrum monitored on the downstream
station, adjust the EVOA for each add channel and pass-through channel for power equilibrium
purposes. For the specific commissioning steps, see 6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of
ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization.

----End

6.3.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths


and Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9+WSM9)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (RDU9
+WSM9) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.

Prerequisite
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.
The ECC communication must be created.
The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete.
The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Background Information
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units
in the Hardware Description.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-17 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with RDU9+WSM9)

O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U

Station C

D40 M40V

TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM

West DM AM
East
F EXPO F
OAU1 RDU9 WSM9 OBU1
I I
TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT IN OUT RC U To F
To D U

EXPI OUT
OBU1 WSM9 RDU9 OAU1
EXPO IN
RC OUT IN OUT TC
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT IN
M40V D40
DCM

O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


EVOA

NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-17, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure the MVOA and then perform
the optical power commissioning on site.
NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at
the same time.
NOTE

The preset values in the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input optical
power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference
Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.

Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add
Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).

----End

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

6.3.8 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths


and Link at ROADM Station C (ROAM+ROAM)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (ROAM
+ROAM) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.

Prerequisite
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.

The ECC communication must be created.

The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete.

The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Background Information
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units
in the Hardware Description.

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-18 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with ROAM+ROAM)

Station C
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN OUT
TC EXPO RC
F OAU1 OBU1 F
IN OUT EXPI IN OUT
I RC ROAM ROAM TC
I
West EXPI U East
U OBU1 OAU1
OUT IN EXPO OUT IN
M M
DM DM RDC TDC
0 0
OUT 1 1 IN
OBU OBU DCM

D40 D40

O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


EVOA

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-18, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure the MVOA and then perform
the optical power commissioning on site.
NOTE

The preset values in the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input optical
power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference
Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.

Procedure
Step 1 See Step 1 through Step 3 in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths
and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).

Step 2 Based on the analysis result of the optical power spectrum monitored on the downstream station,
adjust the EVOA for each add channel for power equilibrium. For specific commissioning steps,
see 6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for
Equalization.
NOTE

The ROAM board cannot be used to commission the optical power for the wavelength in the pass-through
channels, and only the optical power for the add wavelength at the local station can be commissioned.

----End

6.3.9 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths


and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD4+WSMD4)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (WSMD4
+WSMD4) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.

Prerequisite
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.

The ECC communication must be created.

The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete.

The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Background Information
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units
in the Hardware Description.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-19 Fiber connection of ROADM station (networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)


Station C
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM

IN TC DM4
RC OUT
OAU1 OBU1
F IN OUT IN AM4 OUT IN OUT F
West I WSMD4 WSMD4 I
East
U RC AM4 TC U
OUT OUT IN IN
OBU1 DM4 OAU1
OUT IN DM1 AM1 OUT IN
AM1 DM1

OBU

OBU
D40 M40V M40V D40

O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


EVOA

NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-19, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure the MVOA and then perform
the optical power commissioning on site.
NOTE

l In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the WSMD4 board are not shown. The two
pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in the other direction.
l The single-wavelength signals are transmitted directly to the AMn optical port by the OTU board.
NOTE

The preset values in the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input optical
power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference
Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.

Procedure
Step 1 See the steps included in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths
and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).

----End

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

6.3.10 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths


and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD2+WSMD2)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (WSMD2
+WSMD2) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.

Prerequisite
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.
The ECC communication must be created.
The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete.
The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Background Information
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units
in the Hardware Description.

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-20 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSMD2+WSMD2)


Station C
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM

IN TC EXPO
RC OUT
OAU1 OBU1
West F IN OUT IN EXPI OUT IN OUT F
I I East
WSMD2 WSMD2
U RC EXPI TC U
OUT OUT IN IN
OBU1 EXPO OAU1
OUT IN DM AM OUT IN
AM DM
OBU

OBU

D40 M40V M40V D40

O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


EVOA

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-20, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1